Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Shortcut Menus in the Project Manager Window . . . . . . 1-11 Working with the RMxprt Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Undoing RMxprt Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Redoing RMxprt Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Working with the RMxprt Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Working with the RMxprt Machine Editor Windows . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Contents-1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Setting the Window View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Printing in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Working with the RMxprt Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Working with the RMxprt Project Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Viewing RMxprt Design Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Working with the RMxprt Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Showing and Hiding the RMxprt Properties Window . . . . 1-16 Working with the RMxprt Progress Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Working with the RMxprt Message Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Copying Messages in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Quick Start for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMxprt Example Part 1: Create a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMxprt Example Part 2: Select a Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMxprt Example Part 3: Input Design Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMxprt Example Part 4: Analyze the Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMxprt Example Part 5: Create Reports and View Output . . . . RMxprt Example Part 6: Output Design Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 1-19 1-19 1-20 1-28 1-29 1-34
RMxprt Options: Solver Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 RMxprt Options: Export Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Setting Machine Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Material Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Model Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Machine Option for Wire Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-2
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Edit AC Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable Winding Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Winding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Winding Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Variables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Project Variable in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Design Variable in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Datasets in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Datasets in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Mathematical Functions in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining an Expression in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Valid Operators for Expressions in RMxprt . . . . . . Using Piecewise Linear Functions in Expressions in
2-14 2-14 2-17 2-19 2-21 2-21 2-22 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-24 2-24
Using Intrinsic Functions in Expressions in RMxprt . . . . 2-25 RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Using Dataset Expressions in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Assigning Variables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing a Variable to Optimize in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Including a Variable in a Sensitivity Analysis in RMxprt . . . . . . . Choosing a Variable to Tune in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Including a Variable in a Statistical Analysis in RMxprt . . . . . . . 2-27 2-28 2-28 2-29 2-29
Recommended Wire Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Wire Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Export/Import Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Save Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Relative Permittivity for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Relative Permeability for an RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Specifying a BH Curve for Nonlinear Relative Permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Bulk Conductivity for an RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dielectric Loss Tangent for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Loss Tangent for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Coercivity for an RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Core Loss Type for an RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Properties for Core Loss in RMxprt (BP Curve) . . . Electrical Steel Core Loss from a Single-Frequency Electrical Steel Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Power Ferrite Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Mass Density for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Composition for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanent Magnet Materials in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nonlinear vs. Linear Permanent Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Properties for a Non-Linear Permanent Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Properties for a Linear Permanent Magnet . . . . Using Demagnetization Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hysteresis Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 4-14 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-17 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-8
Demagnetization Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Recoil Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Recoil Magnetic Permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Inflection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Curve Fitting of Demagnetization Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Three Parameter Curve Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Four Parameter Curve Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Conductor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Setting the Material Threshold for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Editing Conductivity Properties in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Contents-4
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Creating 3D Rectangular Plots in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Creating Data Tables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Working with Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Removing Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Contents-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Replacing Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Adding Blank Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Sweeping a Variable in a Report in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Function in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Parameter, Variable, or Quantity to Plot in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Quick Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RMxprt Quick Report Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 7-15 7-19 7-21 7-21
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Pole Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35 Limited Space for Wire Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Round Wire Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 Cylinder Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 Edgewise Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Pole Winding with Half Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Exporting Winding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Rotor Winding for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-19 Rotor Vent Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . 9-20 Defining the Shaft Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Shaft Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Solution Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-22 Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Analysis Approach for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . 9-23 Defining a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Defining the General Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 General Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-27 Defining the Stator Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . 9-28 Stator Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-29 Defining the Stator Slots for a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Stator Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Defining the Stator Windings for a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Stator Winding Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Defining the Rotor Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 Rotor Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-42 Defining the Rotor Slots for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 Rotor Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . 9-42 Defining the Rotor Windings for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Rotor Winding Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Contents-8
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Adding or Removing a Vent from a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Defining the Shaft Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Shaft Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-44 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 Solution Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-45 Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Analysis Approach Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Stator Winding Connected to a Sinusoidal AC Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 Stator Winding Fed by a DC to AC Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 Defining an Adjustable-Speed Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 Defining the General Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 General Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 Circuit Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 Defining the Stator Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 Defining the Stator Dimensions and Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 Stator Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 Stator Slot Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59 Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59 Stator Winding Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69 Defining the Rotor Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70 Rotor Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . 9-71
Contents-9
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Defining the Rotor Pole for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71 Rotor Pole Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73 Defining the Shaft Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73 Shaft Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . 9-73 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73 Solution Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74 Permanent-Magnet DC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analysis Approach for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Permanent-Magnet DC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the General Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-76 9-76 9-77 9-77
General Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78 Defining the Stator Data for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . 9-78 Stator Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79 Defining the Stator Pole for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79 Stator Pole Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80 Defining the Rotor Data for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81 Rotor Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81 Defining the Rotor Slots for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82 Rotor Slot Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82 Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83 Defining Different Size Wires for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . 9-87 Rotor Winding Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87 Defining the Commutator and Brush for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89 Commutator and Brush Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90 Defining the Shaft Data for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91 Shaft Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . 9-91 Solution Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
Contents-10
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93 Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93 Defining a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-96 Defining the General Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97 General Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97 Defining the Stator for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97 Stator Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . 9-98 Defining Stator Slots for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99 Stator Slot Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . 9-99 Defining Stator Windings and Insulation for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100 Stator Winding and Insulation for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108 Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-111 Defining the Rotor for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-112 Rotor, Rotor Pole, and Insulation for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-113 Defining the Rotor Pole for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-114 Defining the Rotor Winding Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-115 Rotor Winding Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117 Defining the Rotor Damper Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117 Damper Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117 Defining the Shaft Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-118
Contents-11
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Shaft Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119 Solution Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120 Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121 Analysis Approach for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-121 Defining a Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor . . . . . . . . . 9-123 Defining the General Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-123 General Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-124 Defining the Circuit Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-125 Circuit Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-126 Defining the Stator Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-127 Stator Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-127 Defining the Stator Slots for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128 Stator Slot Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128 Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129 Defining Different Size Wires for a Brushless DC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-138 Stator Winding Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . 9-139 Defining the Rotor Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140 Rotor Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-141 Defining the Rotor Pole for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-141 Rotor Pole Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-143 Defining the Shaft Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-143
Contents-12
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Shaft Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-143 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-143 Analysis Offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-144 Solution Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 9-145 Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-147 Analysis Approach for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-147 Defining a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-149 Defining the General Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-150 General Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . 9-151 Defining the Circuit Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-151 Circuit Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-153 Defining the Stator Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-153 Stator Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . 9-154 Defining the Stator Winding Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-154 Defining Different Size Wires for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-156 Stator Winding Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-157 Defining the Rotor Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-157 Rotor Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . 9-158 Defining the Shaft Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-158 Shaft Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . 9-159 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-159 Solution Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . 9-159 Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161 Analysis Approach for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161
Contents-13
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Defining a Line-Start Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-163 Defining the General Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-164 General Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-164 Defining the Stator Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-164 Stator Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . 9-165 Defining the Stator Slots for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-166 Stator Slot Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-166 Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-167 Defining Different Size Wires for a Line-Start Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-170 Stator Winding Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-171 Optional Vent for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor Stator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-173 Defining the Rotor Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-173 Rotor Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . 9-174 Defining the Rotor Pole for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-174 Rotor Pole Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-175 Optional Rotor Damper for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-175 Defining the Shaft Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176 Shaft Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . 9-176
Contents-14
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176 Solution Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-177 Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analysis Approach for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the General Data for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . 9-179 9-179 9-180 9-181
General Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-181 Defining the Stator Data for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . 9-182 Stator Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-182 Defining the Stator Pole for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . 9-183 Stator Pole Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185 Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185 Defining Different Size Wires for a Universal Motor Stator Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-187 Stator Winding Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-188 Defining the Rotor Data for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . 9-188 Rotor Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-189 Defining the Rotor Slots for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-190 Rotor Slot Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-190 Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-191 Defining Different Size Wires for a Universal Motor Rotor Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-195 Rotor Winding Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-195 Defining the Commutator and Brush for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-197 Commutator and Brush Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . 9-198 Defining the Shaft Data for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . 9-199 Shaft Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-199 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . 9-199 Solution Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-200 General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-201
Contents-15
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Analysis Approach for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-201 DC Machine Operating as a Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-202 DC Machine Operating as a Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-203 Defining a General DC Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204 Defining the General Data for a General DC Machine . . 9-204 General Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-205 Defining the Stator Data for a General DC Machine . . . . 9-205 Stator Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-206 Defining the Stator Pole for a General DC Machine . . . . 9-207 Stator Pole Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . 9-207 Defining the Stator Field Data for a General DC Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-208 Stator Field Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . 9-208 Shunt Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-208 Series Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-209 Compensating Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . 9-210 Commutating Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . 9-211 Winding Data for Commutating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-212 Defining the Rotor Data for a General DC Machine . . . . 9-212 Rotor Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-213 Defining the Rotor Slots for a General DC Machine . . . . 9-214 Rotor Slot Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-214 Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a General DC Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-215 Defining Different Size Wires for a General DC Machine Rotor Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-219 Rotor Winding Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . 9-219 Vent Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-221 Defining the Commutator and Brush for a General DC Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-222 Commutator and Brush Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-223 Defining the Shaft Data for a General DC Machine . . . . . 9-224
Contents-16
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Shaft Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-224 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a General DC Machine . . . 9-224 Solution Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-225 Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-227 Analysis Approach for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-227 Rotor Equipped with an Excitation Winding . . . . . . . . . . . 9-228 Rotor Equipped with a Permanent Magnet Only . . . . . . . 9-228 Power and Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-229 Defining a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-230 Defining the General Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . 9-231 General Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-231 Defining the Stator Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . 9-231 Stator Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-232 Defining the Stator Slot Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-233 Stator Slot Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . 9-233 Defining the Stator Winding Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-234 Stator Winding Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-238 Defining the Rotor Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . 9-240 Rotor Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-241 Defining the Rotor Pole for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . 9-241 Rotor Pole Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . 9-241 Defining the Shaft Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . 9-242 Shaft Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-242 Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . 9-242 Solution Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-243 Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines (NSSM) . . . . . . . . . Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines . . . Defining the General Data for a Three-Phase NSSM . . . 9-244 9-244 9-248 9-248
Defining the Stator for Three-Phase NSSM . . . . . . . . . . . 9-249 Define NSSM Rotor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-253 Define NSSM Shaft Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-256
Contents-17
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Analysis Setup for Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-256 Add Solution Setup for NSSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-256 Validate NSSM Solution Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-257 Design Output for Non-Salient Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . 9-257 View Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-257 View Design Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-258 View Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-259 Create Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-263 Transient FEA of the Non-Salient Synchronous Machines . . . . 9-263 Create Maxwell 2D Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-264 Review Maxwell2D Design Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-264 Stator Vent Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-272 Rotor Vent Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-273
Contents-18
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
1
Getting Started with RMxprt
Rotational Machine Expert (RMxprt) is an interactive software package used for designing and analyzing electrical machines. Using RMxprt, you can simulate and analyze the following types of machines:
Three-phase and single-phase induction motors. Three-phase synchronous motors and generators. Brushless permanent-magnet DC motors. Adjust-speed synchronous motors and generators. Permanent-magnet DC motors. Switched reluctance motors. Line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motors. Universal motors. General DC motors and generators. Claw-pole alternators.
When you start a new model in RMxprt, you first select one of the above motor or generator types. You then enter the parameters associated with that machine type in each RMxprt Properties window. The properties windows are accessed by clicking each of the machine elements (for example, stator, rotor, shaft) under Machine in the project tree. General options are available directly at the Machine level of the project tree. Solution and output options (such as the rated output power) are set when you add a solution setup (by right-clicking Analysis in the project tree). Related Topics: The RMxprt Desktop RMxprt Commands Setting Up A Machine Model Creating a New RMxprt Project
Getting Started with RMxprt 1-1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3.
You specify the name of the project when you save it using the File>Save or File>Save As commands.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The new project is now saved, with the same information as the existing project.
Click the name of the project file at the bottom of the File menu.
Save a new project. Save the active project with a different name or in a different location. Save the active project in another file format for use in another program.
Use the File>Save command to save the active project. Related Topics Saving a New Project Saving the Active Project Saving a Copy of a Project
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3. 4.
Use the file browser to find the directory where you want to save the file. Type the name of the file in the File name box. By default, all files will have the .mxwl extension. Click Save. RMxprt saves the project to the location you specified.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
design, including actions associated with project management, model creation, and solution analysis. With auto-save activated, after a problem occurs, you can choose to re-open the original project file (Projectn.rmpt) in an effort to recover the solution data or to open the auto-save file. To modify the auto-save settings: 1. 2. 3. Click Tools>Options>General Options. The Options dialog box appears. Under the Project Options tab, verify that Do Autosave is selected. This option is selected by default. In the Autosave interval box, enter the number of edits that you want to occur between automatic saves. By default, this option is set at 10. Auto-save always increments forward; therefore, even when you undo a command, RMxprt counts it as an edit.
Note 4.
Click OK to apply the specified auto-save settings. Once the specified number of edits is carried out, a "model-only" save occurs. This means that RMxprt does not save solutions data or clear any undo/redo history. When RMxprt auto-saves, an ".auto" extension is appended to the original project file name. For example, Project1.rmpt will automatically be saved as Projectn.rmpt.auto.
Warning
When you close or rename a project, RMxprt deletes the auto-save file. RMxprt assumes that you have saved any desired changes at this point.
To recover project data in an auto-save file, if RMxprt has unexpectedly crashed: 1. 2. 3. Launch RMxprt from your desktop. Click File>Open,. Select the original Projectn.rmpt project file for which you want to recover its Projectn.rmpt.auto auto-save file. The Crash Recovery window appears, giving you the option to open the original project file
1-6 Getting Started with RMxprt
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
or the auto-save file. 4. Select Open project using autosave file to recover project data in the auto-save file, and then click OK. RMxprt replaces the original project file with the data in the auto-save file. RMxprt immediately overwrites the original project file data with the auto-save file data, removing the results directory (solutions data) from the original project file as it overwrites to the auto-save file. Warning If you choose to recover the auto-save file, you cannot recover the original project file that has been overwritten; recovering data in an auto-save file is not reversible.
RMxprt Files
When you create any project in the Maxwell desktop, including an RMxprt project, it is given a .mxwl file extension and stored in the directory you specify. Any files related to that project are also stored in that directory. Some common file and folder types are listed below: .mxwl project_name.mxwlresults design_name.results design_name.asol Maxwell or RMxprt project. Folder containing results data for a project. Folder containing results data for a design. This folder is stored in the project_name.mxwlresults folder. Results data for a design. This file's contents may be empty if a solution is unavailable. This file is stored in the project_name.mxwlresults folder.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To move back and forth between windows, select the Windows menu, and select the window you want to view.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Machine RMxprt
Tools menu
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Most of the commands on the shortcut menus are also available on the menu bar.
A check box appears next to a command if the item is visible. For example, if a check box appears next to the Project Manager command, then the Project Manager window is currently visible on the desktop. Click Customize to open the Customize dialog box, which enables you to modify the toolbar settings on the desktop.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To execute a command, click a toolbar button or click a selection on the shortcut pull-down list. To display a brief description of the toolbar button, move the pointer over the button. To relocate a toolbar, click on the left edge of a toolbar and drag it to new location.. Hint To modify the toolbars on the desktop, click Tools>Customize. To display all toolbar buttons, click the Reset All button in the Customize window.
Note 2.
To undo the last action you performed on the active project, such as inserting a design, click the project icon. To undo the last action you performed on the active design, click the design icon. You cannot undo an analysis that you have performed on a model, that is, the RMxprt>Analyze command.
Note
When you save a project, RMxprt always clears the entire undo/redo history for the project and its designs.
2.
To redo the last action you canceled on the active project, such as inserting a design or adding project variables, click the project icon. To redo the last action you canceled on the active design, such as drawing an object or deleting a field overlay plot, click the design icon.
Click Edit>Redo.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Your last canceled action is now reapplied. Note When you save a project, RMxprt always clears the entire undo/redo history for the project and its designs.
A check box appears next to this command if the status bar is visible.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Printing in RMxprt
To zoom into the diagram in the window: To zoom out of the diagram in the window:
Printing in RMxprt
The printing commands enable you to print the display in the active window. To print the project: 1. 2. 3. Click File>Print. The Print dialog box appears. You can change the print quality (a higher dpi produces a higher quality print but takes more time and printer memory), or you can send the output to a .prn file. Do one of the following:
Click OK to print the project. Click Cancel to dismiss the window without printing. Click Properties to define printer settings.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Click View>Project Manager. A check box appears next to this command if the Project Manager window is visible. Right-click in the toolbars area on the desktop, and then click Project Manager on the shortcut menu. A check box appears next to this command if the Project Manager window is visible.
Related Topics Working with the RMxprt Project Tree Shortcut Menus in the Project Manager Window
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The RMxprtDesignn node contains the following project details: Machine Allows you to specify parameters for various aspects of the machine. A whole or part geometry will be drawn in the Main tab of the Machine Editor window (based on the values you enter). Allows you to assign parameters to solve for. Displays the solution setups for an RMxprt design. A solution setup specifies how RMxprt computes the solution. Displays any Optimetrics setups added to an RMxprt design. Displays any post-processing reports that have been generated. To edit a project's design details:
In the project tree, double-click the design setup icon that you want to edit.
A dialog box appears with that setup's parameters, which you can then edit.
Click View>Property Window. A check box appears next to this command if the Properties window is visible. Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop, and then click Properties on the shortcut menu. A check box appears next to this command if the Properties window is visible.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Click View>Progress Window. A check box appears next to this command if the Progress window is visible. Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop, and then click Progress on the shortcut menu.
A check box appears next to this command if the Progress window is visible.
Click View>Message Manager. Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop, and then click Message Manager on the shortcut menu.
A check box appears next to this command if the Message Manager is visible. Related Topics Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Project Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Model Copying Messages in RMxprt
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To copy messages: 1. 2. Right-click in the Message Manager. A pop-up appears. Click Copy messages to clipboard.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Analyze the design. Create Reports and View output characteristics curves.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
This closes the window and inserts the Brushless Permanent Magnet DC Motor design in the project. Continue to Part 3 of the example to Input Design Data.
Select the C2 button, and OK to close the window. 3. 4. 5. Click OK to close the Machine properties window. Click the + symbol by the Machine icon to view the design hierarchy of the motor. Double-click the Circuit icon to view the Circuit properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Set the values as indicated below. Lead Angle of Trigger Set this to 0 to obtain the maximum average emf for the following phase in the trig_on period.
Click OK to close the circuit properties window. Double-click the Stator icon to view the Stator properties window. Set the values as shown below. Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Stacking Factor Steel Type Set this to 120. Set this to 75. Set this 65 for the length of the Stator iron core. 0.95 Click on the button to display the Materials window. Select RMxprt library in the Libraries box in the upper right corner of the Materials window: then select M19-24G. Note: If RMxprt is not listed in the libraries box in the upper right corner of the Materials window, quit the Materials window, click Tools>Configure Libraries, add RMxprt (under materials) and click the Save as Default check box. Then click OK.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Set this to 24. Select 2 as the Slot type. Click the button on the row cell to display the Select Slot Type window.
Skew Width 8.
Click the 2 button and OK to close the window. Set this to 1. (To skew one slot pitch.)
Click OK to close the Stator Properties window. Take a moment to look at the Maxwell Design window. If you click the Main tab, you will see two concentric rings that represent the inner and outer diameters you specified. If you click the Winding Editor tab, you see a table of the coils, with columns for Phase, turns, the in slots, and the out slots. There is also a drawing showing the placement of the 24 slots of the type that you defined here.
9.
Click the + symbol by the Stator icon to view the hierarchy under the stator. Set the values as shown below. Some of the properties will not appear until you disable the Auto Design property in the first row. Auto Design Uncheck the box to disable auto design. Close the properties window and open it again. Then set the given values for the slot shapes. Parallel Tooth Uncheck this box. The Tooth Width property becomes invisible. Tooth Width Hs0 Set to 0.5 Hs1 Set to 1.0 Hs2 Set to 8.2 Bs0 Set to 2.5 Bs1 Set to 5.6 Bs2 Set to 7.6
10. Double-click the slot icon to view the Slot Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11. Click OK to close the Slot Properties window. 12. Double-click the stator Winding icon to view the Winding Properties window. Set the values as shown below. Winding Layers Winding Type Set this to 2, "Whole Coiled." Parallel Branches Select 1 for the number of parallel-connected branches, i.e. the coils in all the slots per phase are in series-connected. Conductors per Set this to 60 for the number of conductors per slot, i.e. the Slot number of turns per coil is equal to 30 for double-layer winding. Coil Pitch Set this to 5. For this example, full pitch = 24 slots / 4 poles = 6. This example uses short coil pitch, 5, i.e. a coil spans from slot 1 to slot 6. Number of Strands Select 1 for the number of strands (or number of wires per conductor). Wire Wrap Select 0. This is the total thickness of double side wire insulation. The input value 0 means that RMxprt will automatically check into the wire gauge library for the wrap thickness relevant to the wire gauge. Different manufacturers produce different Wire Wrap Thickness for electromagnetic wire. Typically, Wire Wrap Thickness for electromagnetic wire is 7~10% of Wire Diameter. Wire Size Click on the Properties field to display the Wire Size window and select AUTO for automatic design of wire gauge. Wire Size will be set to 0 in the Wire Size window. This example relies on RMxprt to automatically select the optimum diameter and the gauge code for electromagnetic wire. End/Insulation Input Half-turn Uncheck this box. tab Length Half Turn Length This item is not shown if Input Half Turn Length is unchecked. Winding tab
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
End Adjustment
Set this to 0 for the linear overhang of the end part of the coil out of the iron core as shown below. In this example, the coil turns immediately at the slot opening, therefore input 0.
Base Inner Radius 0 Tip Inner Diameter 0 End Clearance 0 Slot Liner Set this to 0.3 for the single side thickness of slot insulation. Wedge Thickness 0 Layer Insulation 0 Limited Fill Factor 0.75 13. Click OK to close the stator Winding Properties window. 14. Click Machine>Wiiding>Connect All Coils. The Winding tab in the main window shows all coils connected. 15. Double-click the Rotor Icon to view the Rotor Properties window. Set the values as shown below. Outer Diameter Inner Diameter Length Set this to 74.0. This is the Stator inner diameter - 2* AirGap. Input 26 for the inner diameter of the rotor core. This is also the diameter to match the shaft Input 65 for the length of the rotor core. In this example, the lengths of the iron cores of the stator and the rotor are the same.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Steel Type
Select M19-24 for the brand of the silicon-steel sheet for the rotor. In this example, the laminations are punched together on the same sheet; therefore, the brands of the silicon-steel sheet and the stacking factors are the same for the stator and the rotor. Input 0.95. Select 1. Click on the button on the Pole Type field to display the Select Pole Type window.
Click the 1 button and OK to close the window. 16. Click OK to close the Rotor Properties window. 17. Click the + symbol by the Rotor icon to open the project hierarchy under the rotor. 18. Double-click the Pole icon to view the Pole Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Embrace
Input 0.7. Embrace of the rotor represents the ratio of the rotor central angle corresponding to the arc length along the rotor surface of an arched permanent-magnetic piece to the rotor central angle corresponding to a rotor pole. In a four pole machine with Embrace, 1, each arched permanentmagnetic piece covers 90 mechanical degrees along the rotor surface. Similarly, Embrace 0.667 means 60 mechanical degrees of the coverage of the magnet as shown in the figure.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Offset
Input 0. The arched permanent-magnetic pieces to form the magnets of the rotor might not be concentric with the rotor as shown in the figure. In the electric machines with non-uniform air-gap, there exists an offset between the two centers. RMxprt terms it as Pole Arc Offset. This example uses uniform air-gap; therefore, the offset is set to 0.
Magnet Type
Select XG196/96. This permanent-magnetic steel possesses residual flux density 0.96 Tesla, coercive force 690 kA/m, maximum magnetic energy product 183 kJ/m3, and relative recoil magnetic permeability 1.0. Magnet Thickness Input 3.5 for the thickness of the permanent-magnetic steel.
19. Click OK to close the Pole Properties window. To continue to Part 4 of the example, go to Analyze the Design.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4.
Close the dialog to save the Setup. Const Power 0.55 kW 220 1500 75c
Load Type Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature 5.
Click RMxprt>Validation Check to ensure that all values have been set. If any items do not pass validation, use the diagnostic information in the Message Window to resolve any issues.
6.
When the design has been validated, click RMxprt>Analyze All. The progress of the analysis is shown in the Progress window.
Solution Data - the Data field in the Solutions window is a drop down menu from which you can select the following:
2.
Full Load Operation Material Consumption No Load Operation Permanent Magnet Rotor Data Stator Slot Stator Winding Steady State Parameters
Parameter Design Sheet Curves - Selecting the Curves tab lets you view pre-defined graphs.
With the Solution tab selected, select Stator Winding as the Data selected. Except for a few data corresponding to the wire gauge, this part of data should be the same as the data input in the Stator Winding Properties window. Since automatic design function for
Getting Started with RMxprt 20-29
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
the wire gauge is selected in the input, RMxprt calculates the following data: Wire Diameter (mm): 0.8118 for the diameter of the electromagnetic wire.
Wire Wrap 0 for the insulation thickness of the electromagnetic wire. Because input Thickness (mm): wire wrap is 0, RMxprt picks it up from the selected wire library (American wire), but it still 0 based on the wire wrap data in the library. Stator Slot Fill Factor (%): 61.4557.
The electromagnetic wire with Wire Diameter of 0.8118 is equivalent to AWG 20. Stator Slot Fill Factor represents the percentage of occupation of the slot area, i.e. the ratio of the total square sectional area of wires (including Wire Wrap Thickness) in a slot to the total slot area less the slot insulation. a. b. c. d. e. Now that Wire Diameter of the electromagnetic wire is calculated by RMxprt, you can open the Winding Properties window and specify the value. For Wire Size, open the Wire Size selection window, select 0.8118 for the electromagnetic wire diameter, which corresponds to 20 for the wire gauge. In the slot Wire Wrap field, input 0.08 for the insulation thickness of the electromagnetic wire. Click OK to close the properties window. Click RMxprt>Analyze All.
After the second analysis is completed, click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data to view the effect of Wire Wrap Thickness of the electromagnetic wire on Stator Slot Fill Factor. Wire Diameter (mm): 0.8118.
Wire Wrap 0.08. Thickness (mm): Stator Slot Fill Factor (%): 3. 74.165.
In the Solutions window, change the Data selection to Rotor Data. The Rotor data is displayed. Here most of the data is the same as input in the Rotor Pole properties window. The only difference is that the Pole Arc radius replaces Pole Arc Offset and, in addition to Mechanical Pole Embrace which is input based on the physical geometry, Electrical Pole Embrace is also given. Electrical Pole Embrace is calculated by the ratio of the average magnetic flux density to the maximum magnetic flux density according to the magnetic flux density distribution along the air-gap.
4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
This part displays the characteristic data of the permanent magnets as well as the Demagnetization Flux density, the Recoil Residual Flux density and Recoil Coercive Force of the recoil line based on the demagnetization flux density, which are used for finite element analysis when a linear PM characteristics must be specified. 5. In the Solutions window, change the Data selection to Steady State Parameters. This part displays the stator winding factor, direct- and the quadratic-axis inductances, the leakage inductance, the resistance of the phase winding, the direct- and the quadratic-axis time constants, the ideal torque constant KT and the ideal back emf constant KE. 6. In the Solutions window, change the Data selection to No-Load Operation. This part displays the magnetic flux densities in the teeth and the yoke of the stator, and the yoke of the rotor. The maximum value among the three magnetic flux densities is 1.52 Tesla, which locates at the knee part of the B-H curve, below the saturation situation. The mmfs of the teeth and the yoke of the stator, the air-gap, the yoke and the permanent magnet of the rotor are given respectively for half magnetic reluctance path. The armature reaction mmf due to the armature current is referred to the demagnetization mmf. The magnetic flux leakage coefficient takes into account the part of the magnetic flux in the rotor not linking with the stator. The correction factors for the yoke lengths of the stator and the rotor to calculate the yoke mmfs of the stator and the rotor are also given here. The no-load revolution speed of this machine is equal to 2001 rpm. 7. In the Solutions window, change the Data selection to Full Load Operation. At Rated Output Power (kW): 0.550, the following characteristic parameters of the machine are calculated as: Parameters Average Input Current (of input current waveform in one voltage period) RMS Armature Current (of phase current waveform in one voltage period) Armature Thermal Load (product of Specific Electric Loading and Armature Current Density Specific Electric Load (stator current distribution per circumferential length along air-gap) Armature Current Density (through cross-sectional area of stator wire) 4.73 A/mm2 14.97 70.88 A2/mm3 ) A/mm 2.45 A Calculated Values 2.93 Units A
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Frictional and Wind Loss (at computed Rated Speed) Iron-Core Loss (due to loss curves of stator and rotor iron-core materials) Armature Copper Loss (stator winding ohmic loss) Transistor Loss (transistor switching loss) Diode Loss (diode power consumption) Total Loss (sum of above losses) Output Power (the rated operating point is derived based on Output Power) Input Power (product of Rated Voltage and Average Input Current) Efficiency (ratio of Output Power to Input Power) Rated Speed (at Rated Output Power) Rated Torque (at Rated Output Power) Locked-Rotor Torque (starting torque at zero revolution speed) Locked-Rotor Current (starting current at zero revolution speed) 8.
11.46 20.24
W W
W W W W W
645.6
% rpm Nm Nm A
In the Solutions window, select the Design Sheet tab, and scroll down to Winding Arrangement. This is the layout and the arrangement of the whole two-phase winding of phases A and B, and the short coil pitch factor 5 is taken into account.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The 2-phase, 2-layer winding can be arranged in 6 slots as below: AAABBB 9. In the Solutions window with the Design Sheet table selected, scroll down to Transient FEA Angle per slot (elec. degrees): Phase-A axis (elec. degrees): First slot center (elec. degrees): 30 105 0
Input Data. (This is at the very bottom.) The following data of the armature winding corresponds to one phase armature winding. Number of Turns (total number of turns viewed into output terminals) Parallel Branches Terminal Resistance (stator winding dc resistance under given operating temperature, 75oC) End Leakage Inductance (of stator winding) The following data is the equivalent values used to 2D electromagnetic field analyses. Equivalent Model Depth Equivalent Stator Stacking Factor Equivalent Rotor Stacking Factor Equivalent Hc (coercive force) 65 0.95 0.95 Tesla kA/m 690 mm 1.7 mH 1 4.5 Ohm 360
Estimated Rotor Moment of Inertia 0.0015 kg.m2 10. In the Solutions window, click the Curves tab. This displays the Input DC Current Versus Speed graph. If the text is too small to read, you can resize the window. You can view other predefined graphs by selecting from the drop down menu in the Name field. Selecting the Curves tab lets you view pre-defined graphs for the following relations:
Inut DC Current Versus Speed Efficiency Versus Speed Output Power Versus Speed Output Torque Versus Speed
Getting Started with RMxprt 20-33
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Cogging Torque in Two Teeth Induced Coil Voltages at Rated Speed Air-Gap Flux Density Induced Winding Phase Voltage at Rated Speed Winding Currents Under Load Phase Voltage Under Load
You can also create additional plots with multiple curves. 11. For example, click RMxprt>Results>Create Report. This displays the Create Report dialog box. Click OK to display the Traces window. 12. In the Traces window, select Input DC Current and Efficiency vs Speed, and click the Add Trace button. Then select Output Torque. 13. These traces appear in the Traces field. Click Done to close the Traces window and display the combined graph. To continue to part Six of the example, go to Output Design Data.
Teeth to Teeth
Design Sheet
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export>Maxwell 2D. This displays the Export Maxwell 2D window. Specify a ProjectName. Click OK. The Progress window shows activity. To export a Simplorer model, click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export>Simplorer Model. This displays the Export Simplorer window. Provide a project name and a location. Click OK.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2
Setting Up RMxprt Projects
An RMxprt project is a folder that includes one or more models, or designs. Each design ultimately includes a geometric model, material assignments, and field solution and post-processing information. A new project called Projectn is automatically created when the software is launched, where n is a number. You can also open a new project by clicking File>New. In general, use the File menu commands to manage projects. If you move or change the names of files without using these commands, the software may not be able to find information necessary to solve the model.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Permanent magnet definition, including the coercivity, energy density, and relative recovery permeability. BH-curve parameters.
Use the Setup commands (either on the RMxprt menu or on the Analysis or Optimetrics submenus via the project tree) to specify variable, parametric, and optimization settings. Use the Validate command to validate the design. Use the Analyze commands to generate a solution, run a parametric analysis, or run an optimization. Use the Results post-processing commands to display the lamination and plot the solutions. Use the Analysis Setup>Export command to export the model as an .sm2 or .sm3 file that can be read into Maxwell 2D or Maxwell 3D for more complex analyses. Once the exported file is created, you can then create a new Maxwell project from the exported file.
Related Topics: Specifying RMxprt Winding Data Quick Start for RMxprt
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
1. 2. 3.
Set the Material Threshold for treating materials as conductors/insulators. Set Export Options . Specify User Defined Data. Click RMxprt>Design Settings. The Design Settings dialog box appears with the Set Material Threshold tab selected. Type a value in the Conductivity Threshold text box (Default=10,000). Type a value in the Permeability text box (Default=100). RMxprt will treat materials with conductivity greater than 10,000 as conductors, and materials with Permeability greater than 100 as steels.
Note 4.
If you want these values to be the default, change the values by clicking the Tools>Options>RMxprt Options menu and setting the material thresholds in the RMxprt Options dialog. Click OK.
5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Teeth to Teeth
Segmented Arc Note These options may also be set on the Export Options tab of the RMxprt Options dialog box. Using the Tools>Options>RMxprt Options command changes the default for the current design and all future designs.
You may also set the default Design Sheet for use with RMxprt by entering the path and filename or by browsing to the Excel file using the ellipsis button. Related Topics Generating a Custom Design Sheet for RMxprt
Some special requests from a user which are not necessary to be added to RMxprt UI; Some common requests from users which have been implemented in RMxprt solver, but have not been added in RMxprt UI.
When a user's requests have been implemented in an RMxprt solver but have not been added in RMxprt UI, the updated solver and the required file format for user defined data will be sent to the user. To use the feature of user defined data, the user must first edit the data file using a text editor
2-4 Setting Up RMxprt Projects
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
according to the format provided. Then, select RMxprt>Design Settings to display the Design Settings dialog. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select the User Defined Data tab. Click the Enable checkbox to enable the use of User Defined Data. User Defined Data may be entered directly into the text box. Click in the box and enter the data entries desired. Alternatively, click Import File to import user defined data from an external file. Browse to the directory containing the file. Select the user defined data file which will be displayed in File name box. Click Open to confirm the selection. The file contents will be imported into the text box. Click OK to complete the setup.
User Defined Data is save in the design file. Changes to User Defined Data will cause existing solutions to become invalid.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3.
Project Options Miscellaneous Options Default Units Analysis Options WebUpdate Options
Click each tab, and make the desired selections. Click OK.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3.
Click each tab, and make the desired selections. Click OK.
2.
Three Phase Induction Motor Single Phase Induction Motor Three Phase Synchronous Machine Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Switched Reluctance Motor Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor Universal Motor DC Machine Claw-Pole Synchronous Machine Three Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine
In the Material Threshold Options section, enter the Default conductivity and Default permeability values in siemens/m. Setting the material thresholds under Tools>Options impacts the default setting for the current and all future projects/designs. To change the material threshold for the current design only, use the RMxprt>Design Settings command and change the material thresholds on the Set Material Thresholds tab.
Note
3.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Note
Save before solving When you enable the Save before solving setting, the project is only saved if it has been modified since its last save. Apply variation deletions immediately
Critical (highest) Priority (Not recommended) Above Normal Priority (Not recommended) Normal Priority Below Normal Priority Idle (lowest) Priority
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Some of these and other options are available via the Tools>Options>Machine Options command.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Machine Editor Options dialog box appears. 2. 3. Select American or Chinese from the Wire Setting pull-down list. Click OK. The corresponding data for wire gauge appear automatically in the pop-up window for Machine>Wire. Related Topic Editing Wire Data
Wire Shape Limit (B/A) max the maximum ratio between the wide and the narrow sides. Wire Shape Limit (B/A) min b.
Use the radio buttons specify whether to consider priority factors. All Size for No Consideration of Priority Factors Select the radio button All Size on the right to Type of Wire-Data Table and then click the command button Calculate in the window Wire Data, all the sectional areas of wire
Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-11
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
gauge with the ratio B/A between the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition (B/A) max > B / A > (B/A) min appear in the table Rectangular Wire Data. Skip One for Consideration of Priority Factors Select the radio button Skip One on the right to Type of Wire-Data Table and then click the command button Calculate in the window Wire Data, all the sectional areas of wire gauge with the ratio B/A between the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition (B/A) max > B / A > (B/A) min appear in three different modes in the table Rectangular Wire Data.
At the cross of the odd columns and the odd rows, the sectional areas appear in black numbers (recommended to use). At the cross of the odd columns and the even rows or the even columns and the odd rows, the sectional areas appear in blue numbers (rarely used). At the cross of the even columns and the even rows, the sectional areas do not show (generally not used).
This is convenient for users to use recommended wire gauge according to R20 Priority Number Series. 4. 5. 6. 7. Optionally, to add new rows or columns for the wire, click Add Row or Add Column. Optionally, click Import to import wire data from a file. Optionally, click Export to export the data you entered to a file. When you are finished, click Save to save the data, and click Close to close the window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Export Options dialog box appears. 2. Select or clear the following Field check boxes: According to the geometric symmetry, the structure of electric machine can be divided into several periods. The four pole electric machine in this example has a whole slot number per pole per phase, therefore, it can be divided into four periods. Choose the smaller period to shorten the run-time for 2D Maxwell analyses. The angular displacement from the rotor to the stator in electric degrees. The air-gap is divided uniformly along the circumference. Band Arc is the central angle corresponding to each division. The effective range of its value is between 1o to 5o, the default value is 3o. In 2D electromagnetic field analysis to the torque with 2D Maxwell, The value of Band Arc is sensitive. Less the value, finer the air-gap meshes, more accurate the torque calculation, but longer the computation time in order. If select this box, the central lines of the rotor teeth or the rotor magnet poles coincide with the periodic dividing lines, otherwise, the central lines of the rotor slots or the interpole lines of the rotor magnet poles coincide with the periodic dividing line. Nevertheless, the central lines of the stator teeth always coincide with the periodic dividing lines. Periodic
Teeth to Teeth
For Geometry Creation 3. 4. 5. For the selected field, enter values in any enabled text boxes. For the Design Sheet, type a file name in the Excel Template text box.
You can also click the ... button to find and select a file.
Click OK.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Edit AC Windings
RMxprt can automatically arrange almost all commonly used single- or double-layer poly-phase ac windings provided all coils have the same number of turns. Users do not need to define coils one by one. For a double-layer winding, RMxprt can also handle the coils with half turns which are arranged in the order of even, odd, even, odd, , as long as it is physically possible. RMxprt also provides a very flexible tool Winding Editor in order for the users to design a variety of special winding types according to their own needs, such as compound single- and double-layer winding, big- and small-phase-spread variable-pole multiple-speed winding, sine-wave three-phase winding, and so forth. The Winding Editor is available to the following types of electric machines: 1.Three-phase induction motors 2.Single-phase induction motors 3.Three-phase synchronous motors and generators 4.Line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motors 5.Claw-pole alternators 6.Adjustable-speed permanent-magnet synchronous motors and generators 7.Brushless permanent-magnet DC motors When you edit the AC winding of a new design for the first time, RMxprt creates a default winding arrangement based on the basic winding specifications: Number of Phases, Number of Poles, Number of Slots, Winding Layers, Conductors per Slot, and Coil Pitch. Then you can edit the winding configuration based on the default arrangement.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2.
Select Editor as the Winding Type and click OK. This closes the Winding Type selection window and sets the Winding Type Value to Editor. It also enables the command Machine>Winding>Edit Layout on the menu bar. Now the
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3.
Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. This displays the Winding Editor dialog as shown. The Winding Editor dialog box includes functions that do not appear in the Winding Editor tab sheet in the RMxprt Machine Editor window. In addition, right-clicking in the data table section of the Winding Editor tab in the Machine
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Editor displays a shortcut menu where you may also select Edit Layout.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Turns In Slots
is for the number of turns of the coil. is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing in ('flow-in-side' for short). If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window, the slot number ends with a "T" to show the top layer. is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing out ("flow-outside" for short). If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window, the slot number ends with a "B" to show the bottom layer.
Out Slots
By changing the properties in the columns of the table, it is possible to arrange the distribution of coils of single and double layer winding of any type required. The Winding Editor also includes three check boxes: Periodic Multiplier indicates the possibility to select the number of unit machines for editing the winding arrangement. It has a pull-down list box to show the possible numbers for the periodic multiplier. When checked, the pull-down list box to the right displays the numbers of unit machines for selection. Selecting 1 means the whole slots are considered as one unit machine, and all the coils is listed in the table of the edit window. Selecting 2 lists half of the total coils in the table, and the whole slots are divided into two unit machines, etc. When the check box Periodic Multiplier: is unchecked, the pull-down list box to the right is grayed (disabled); all the coils are listed in the table. Checking the check box (multiple choices) Constant Turns indicates that the number of turns keeps constant and the column Turns in the table is grayed (disabled). If the check box Constant Turns is unchecked, the column Turns in the table is brightened allowing for editing and modifying the number of turns. Checking this box grays the column Out Slots to the values cannot be edited. It means that the coil pitch is constant. For the two-layer windings, all the flow-in-side slots are defined as top layer, and all the flow-out-side slots as bottom layer. The flow-out-side slot number is automatically computed based on the input in the edit box Coil Pitch in the tab sheet Winding in the project tree in the RMxprt Machine Editor window, and the column Out Slot is disabled. When the check box Constant Pitch is unchecked, the column Out Slot is enabled to allow arbitrarily changing the slot pitch for each coil.
Constant Turns
Constant Pitch
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The dialog box Winding Editor includes three command buttons. Default Reset all the data in the table resumes to the situation of data from the automatic arrangement by RMxprt. all the data in the table resumes to the situation of data when the dialog box Winding Editor was first opened, or resumes to the data that you have saved. to accept the current values and close the dialog box Winding Editor.
OK
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
as shown:
2. 3.
To remove the connections in the graphical display in the Machine Editor window, select Machine>Winding>Disconnect All Coils. Winding connections may also be viewed by shortcut menu. Right-click on the winding layout section of the Machine Editor window, a shortcut menu pops up. Select Connect All Coils or Disconnect All Coils to toggle the coils display on or off. If you right click on a slot layer, commands related to that slot layer will be enabled, and you will be able to view or hide only one coil or one phase connection related to the slot layer. You may copy the connection drawing to clipboard from the shortcut menu as well.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
When you expect to change a parameter often. When you expect to use the same parameter value often. When you intend to run a parametric analysis in which you specify a series of variable values within a range to solve. When you intend to optimize a parameter value by running an optimization analysis.
There are two types of variables in RMxprt: Project Variables A project variable can be assigned to any parameter value in the project in which it was created. RMxprt differentiates project variables from other types of variables by prefixing the variable name with the $ symbol. You can manually include the $ symbol in the project variable's name, or RMxprt can automatically append the $ after you define the variable. Design Variables A design variable can be assigned to any parameter value in the RMxprt design in which it was created. Related Topics Setting up an Optimetrics Analysis
Alternatively, right-click the project name in the project tree, and then click Project Variables on the shortcut menu.
The Properties dialog box appears. 2. 3. Under the Project Variables tab, click Add. The Add Property dialog box appears. In the Name box, type the name of the variable. Project variable names must start with the symbol $ followed by a letter. Variable names may include alphanumeric characters and underscores ( _ ). The names of intrinsic functions and the pre-defined constant pi () cannot be used as variable names. 4. In the Value box, type the quantity that the variable represents. Optionally, include the units of
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
measurement. Warning If you include the variable's units in its definition (in the Value box), do not include the variable's units when you enter the variable name for a parameter value.
The quantity can be a numerical value, a mathematical expression, or a mathematical function. The quantity entered will be the current, or default, value for the variable. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Click OK. You return to the Properties dialog box. The new variable and its value are listed in the table. Optionally, type a description of the variable in the Description box. Optionally, select Read-Only. The variable's name, value, unit, and description cannot be modified when Read-only is selected. Optionally, select Hidden. If you clear the Show Hidden option, the hidden variable will not appear in the Properties dialog box. Click OK.
The new variable can now be assigned to a parameter value in the project in which it was created.
Alternatively, right-click the design name in the project tree, and then click Design Properties on the shortcut menu.
The Properties dialog box appears. 2. 3. Under the Local Variables tab, click Add. The Add Property dialog box appears. In the Name box, type the name of the variable. Variable names must start with a letter, and may include alphanumeric characters and underscores ( _ ). The names of intrinsic functions and the pre-defined constant pi () cannot be used as variable names. 4. In the Value box, type the quantity that the variable represents. Optionally, include the units of measurement. If you include the variable's units in its definition (in the Value box), do not include the variable's units when you enter the variable name for a parameter value.
Note
The quantity can be a numerical value, a mathematical expression, or a mathematical function. The quantity entered will be the current or default value for the variable. 5. Click OK. You return to the Properties dialog box. The new variable and its value are listed in the table.
21-22 Setting up RMxprt Projects
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6. 7.
Optionally, type a description of the variable in the Description box. Click OK.
The new variable can now be assigned to a parameter value in the design in which it was created.
The dataset plot is extrapolated into an expression that can be used in parametric analyses or assigned to a material property value.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The following mathematical functions may be used to define expressions: Basic functions Intrinsic functions Trigonometric expressions /, +, -, *, mod (modulus), ** (exponentiation), - (Unary minus), == (equals), ! (not), != (not equals), > (greater than), < (less than), >= (greater than equals), <= (less than equals), && (logical and), || (logical or) if, sqn, abs, exp, pow, ln (natural log), sqrt sin, cos, tan, asin, acos, atan, sinh, cosh, tanh
The predefined variables X, Y, Z, Phi, Theta, and R must be entered as such. X, Y, and Z are the rectangular coordinates. Phi, Theta, and R are the spherical coordinates. All trigonometric expressions expect their arguments to be in radians, and the inverse trigonometric functions' return values are in radians (although the user interface often converts them to degrees automatically). These function names are reserved and may not be used as variable names.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
addition subtraction equals not equals greater than less than greater than or equal to less than or equal to logic and logic or
6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 8 8
Arctangent (in range atan(x) of -/4 to /4 degrees) Arctangent (in range atan2(y,x) of -/2 to /2 degrees) Hyperbolic Arcsine Hyperbolic Sine Hyperbolic Cosine Hyperbolic Tangent asinh(x) sinh(x) cosh(x) tanh(x) Hyperbolic Arctangent atanh(x)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
even
Returns 1 if integer part of the number is even; returns 0 otherwise. Returns 1 if integer part of the number is odd; returns 0 otherwise. Sign extraction Exponential (e ) Raise to power (xy) If
x
even(x)
odd
odd(x)
Piecewise Linear with pwl(dataset_exp, variable) linear extrapolation on x Piecewise Linear x with linear extrapolation on x pwlx(dataset_exp, variable)
pwlx
pwl_periodic Piecewise Linear with pwl_periodic(dataset_exp, variable) periodic extrapolation on x sqrt ln Square Root Natural Logarithm (The "log" function has been discontinued. If you use "log(x)" in an expression, the software automatically changes it to "ln(x)".) log10 int nint max Logarithm base 10 Truncated integer function Nearest integer log10(x) int(x) nint(x) sqrt(x) ln(x)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Minimum value of two min(x,y) parameters Modulus Fractional part (remainder) mod(x,y) rem(x.y)
Note
If you do not specify units, all trigonometric functions interpret their arguments as radians. Likewise, inverse trigonometric functions' return values are in given in radians. When the argument to a trigonometric expression is a variable, the units are assumed to be radians. If you want values interpreted in degrees, supply the argument with the unit name deg.
Type the variable name or mathematical expression in place of a parameter value in a Value box. If you typed a variable name that has not been defined, the Add Variable dialog box appears, enabling you to define the design variable. If you typed a variable name that included the $ prefix, but that has not been defined, the Add Variable dialog box appears, enabling you to define the project variable. You can assign a variable to nearly any design parameter assigned a numeric value in RMxprt.
Setting up RMxprt Projects 21-27
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Note 4. 5.
Select the Optimization option. For the variable you want to optimize, select Include. The selected variable is now available for optimization in an optimetrics setup defined in the current design or project.
6.
Optionally, override the default minimum and maximum values that Optimetrics will use for the variable in every optimization analysis. During optimization, the optimizer does not consider variable values that lie outside of this range. Click OK.
7.
Note 4. 5.
Select the Sensitivity option. For the variable you want to include in the sensitivity analysis, select Include. The selected variable is now available for sensitivity analysis in a sensitivity setup defined in the current design or project.
6.
Optionally, override the default minimum and maximum values that Optimetrics will use for the variable in every sensitivity analysis. During sensitivity analysis, Optimetrics will not con-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
sider variable values that lie outside of this range. 7. Optionally, override the default initial displacement value that Optimetrics will use for the variable in every sensitivity analysis. During sensitivity analysis, Optimetrics will not consider a variable value for the first design variation that is greater than this step size away from the starting variable value. Click OK.
8.
Note 4. 5. 6.
Select the Tuning option. For the variable you want to tune, select Include. Click OK. The selected variable is now available for tuning in the Tune dialog box.
Note 4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5.
For the variable you want to include in the statistical analysis, select Include. The selected variable is now available for statistical analysis in a statistical setup defined in the current design or project.
6. 7.
Optionally, override the distribution criteria that Optimetrics will use for the variable in every statistical analysis. Click OK.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3
Wire Specification Libraries
RMxprt contains a library of standard wire sizes for use in machine designs. These wire gauge specifications are based on widely used standards currently available in industry.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
American.wir ANSI_SingleFilm.wir ANSI_HeavyFilm.wir ANSI_TripleFilm.wir ANSI_QuadFilm.wir AWG_Int_SingleFilm.wir AWG_Int_HeavyFilm.wir AWG_Int_TripleFilm.wir AWG_Int_QuadFilm.wir Chinese.wir IEC_R20Grade1.wir IEC_R20Grade2.wir IEC_R20Grade3.wir IEC_R40Grade1.wir IEC_R40Grade2.wir IEC_R40Grade3.wir
File American.wir provides dimensions for all ANSI bare wires. Files ANSI*.wir provide dimensions for bare and film insulated copper wires with single, heavy, triple and quad builds of integer and half AWG numbers.
Files IEC_R20*.wir provide dimensions of enameled copper wires with Grade-1, 2, and 3 insulations of R20 series. Files IEC_R40*.wir provide dimensions of R40 series. In files IEC*.wir, the gauge numbers are equivalent to the AWG numbers according to the nominal diameters.
These files are stored in the file folder <Library Directory>/syslib, where <Library Directory> is set via Tools>Options>General Options>Project Options.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2.
System Libraries - libraries installed with Maxwell, located at <Library Directory>/syslib User Libraries - user created public libraries, located at <Library Directory>/userlib Personal Libraries - user created private libraries, located at <Project Directory>/PersonalLib where <Library Directory> and <Project Directory> are set via Tools>Options>General Options>Project Options.
3. 4.
Select one specification library from the pull-down list in Wire Setting area. Click OK to close the dialog box. The new wire setting does not affect all existing designs, but affects all designs inserted later. Wire specification library is saved with each design.
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Hint
To modify the wire specification library saved in an existing design, double click the design to active its Machine Editor window, click Machine>Wire, modify wire data or Import a wire specification library file, and Save wire data to the design.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2.
Note
in: English Unit System stands for British unit system. mm: Metric Unit System stands for the metric unit system. Changing the unit system is only for specifying input data unit, not for transferring data between two unit systems.
There are two tabs Round and Rectangle in the dialog box Edit Wire Data for editing two wire shapes.
Wire Specification Libraries 3-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Gauge No.: wire gauge index number. Diameter: diameter of bare copper wire, in mm or inch. Wrap: thickness of insulation wrap, in mm or inch as shown.
You can edit the wire data in the spreadsheet by doing the following: 1. 2. 3. Directly modify the wire data. Add new rows for the wire by clicking Add Row. Delete rows for the wire by clicking Delete Row.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Wire Shape Limit (B/A) max: the maximum ratio between the wide and the narrow sides. Wire Shape Limit (B/A) min: the minimum ratio between the wide and the narrow sides.
All Size: For No Consideration of Priority Factors. Click the command button Calculate in the dialog box Edit Wire Data, all the sectional areas of wire gauge with the ratio B/A between the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition (B/A)max > B / A > (B/A) min appear in the spread sheet table. Skip One:
Wire Specification Libraries 3-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
For Consideration of Priority Factors. Click the command button Calculate in the dialog box Edit Wire Data, all the sectional areas of wire gauge with the ratio B/A between the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition (B/A) max > B / A > (B/A) min appear in three different modes in the spread sheet. 1. 2. 3. At the cross of the odd columns and the odd rows, the sectional areas appear in black numbers (recommended to use). At the cross of the odd columns and the even rows or the even columns and the odd rows, the sectional areas appear in blue numbers (rarely used). At the cross of the even columns and the even rows, the sectional areas do not show (generally not used).
This is convenient for users to use recommended wire gauge according to R20 Priority Number Series.
Wire Sides
You can edit the wire data in the spread sheet: 1. 2. 3. Directly modify the wire data. Add new rows or columns for the wire, click Add Row or Add Column. Delete rows or columns for the wire, click Delete Row or Delete Column.
Before editing, you can import the wire data from a file:
Note
Save wire data only updates the wire data in the active design.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4
Working with Materials in RMxprt
RMxprt shares many common functions related to materials and material handling with Maxwell3D and Maxwell2D. For general topics such as, Assigning Materials, Searching for Materials, Adding New Materials, and Viewing and Modifying Material Attributes, see the topics in Maxwell help under Assigning Materials. RMxprt includes a material library containing common materials used in motor design. However, this library needs to be configured so that it is automatically loaded for any new RMxprt design. Once the library is configured, you can add, remove, and edit RMxprt materials in two main ways:
Using the Tools>Edit Configured Libraries>Materials menu command. Right-clicking Materials in the project tree and selecting Edit All Libraries.
Editing definitions from the project window does not modify the configured libraries for any particular design. To consider the current design, use the Tools>Edit Configured Libraries option. Doing so ensures that new libraries are added to the configured list for the current design. If you edit materials from this command for the current and then export them, they will also be available to assign to objects in other designs. Related Topics: Configuring Design Libraries Material Library Management for RMxprt
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Soft-Magnetic Materials
The stator and the rotor iron cores in the electric machine are generally laminated with punched sheets of nonlinear soft-magnetic silicon steel. Some special types of electric machines, such as moment motor, turbo-generator etc., use integrated solid rotor iron core of soft-magnetic material. For magnetic field analysis and core loss analysis of the electric machine, the magnetization characteristics (B-H Curve) and the loss characteristics (B-P Curve) of the iron-core material must be defined. The dialogue boxes to do so are accessed from the View/Edit Material window, which, in turn is accessed from the Edit Libraries window. Access to the window for editing the B-H curve is enabled when you set the Magnetic Permeability value to nonlinear (rather than simple or Anisotropic). When you set the value to nonlinear, the value field changes to a B-H Curve button. Click the B-H curve button to open the window. For the loss characteristics (B-P Curve), you first set the Core Loss Type of the material to Electrical Steel (rather than None or Power Ferrite) as a material property in the View/Edit Material window. When you do so, this enables the Calculate Properties selection for drop down at the bottom of the window. Select Core Loss Coefficient from the drop down menu to open the B-P Curve window. Related Topics: Adding New Materials to an RMxprt Project Setting the Material Threshold for RMxprt Assigning Materials Removing Materials Validating Materials Sorting Materials Viewing and Modifying Material Attributes Copying Materials Exporting Materials to a Library Calculating Properties for Core Loss in RMxprt (BP Curve)
2.
In the project tree, you can also right-click Materials, and select Edit All Libraries.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The View/Edit Material dialog box appears. 3. 4. Type a name for the new material in the Material Name text box. In the View/Edit Material for section, select whether this material should be available for the Active Design only, for This Product only or for All Products. The selection makes a difference in the properties displayed. When you select certain Type or Value options, additional parameters appear beneath some properties in the same way that Magnitude appears beneath Magnetic Coercivity. As necessary, specify values for any additional parameters that appear.
Note
5.
In the Properties of the Material table, specify the Type and the Value for the following material properties, displayed when Active Design is selected:
6. 7.
Relative Permeability. Bulk Conductivity Magnetic Coercivity (including the Magnitude of the vector) Core Loss Type - type selections for this property may enable access to coefficient calculation windows, and enable additional properties. Mass Density Relative Permittivity Dielectric Loss Tangent Magnetic Loss Tangent Composition
Optionally, change the Units for any of the properties. Click Validate Material to verify the settings you have specified are valid for the existing properties. If the material setup is valid, a green check mark appears below the Validate Material button. Click OK to save the new material. The Edit Libraries dialog box reappears, with the new material added to the list of materials. Click OK to close the Edit Libraries dialog box.
8. 9.
4-4 Working with Materials in RMxprt
T(1,1) T(2,2)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Note
This property is not used in RMxprt design analysis, but it will be transferred to Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt.
T(1,1) T(2,2)
You can also selection a Simple or Nonlinear type for each of these parameters. Nonlinear Click BH Curve, and specify the coordinates for the BH-curve in the B-H Window.
Note
2. 3. 4.
Select an existing material that you need to edit, and click View / Edit Material. Click Add Material.
Either of these actions open the View/ Edit Materials window. Under the Relative Permeability property, select nonlinear as the value. This opens the B H Curve window. Set the Units for H and the Units for B by selecting from the drop down menus. Do the following in the BH Curve window:
Note
Enter B and H values in each row of the Coordinates table. The value of B must increase along the curve. Also notice that placing the cursor in the field in the coordinates table enables the Add Row and Delete Row buttons.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Add Row Above Add Row Below Append Rows (and specify the number of rows to append to the table in the dialog box that appears) Delete Rows
Optionally, click Import from file to import B-H curve from a file, and if they are in the wrong columns, click Swap X-Y Data to switch the B values and H values in the graphics display. 5. Click OK to close the window. The BH curve you have defined is associated with the Relative Permeability property of the material.
T(1,1) T(2,2)
You can specify a Simple or Nonlinear type for each of these parameters.
Note
T(1,1) T(2,2)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Note
This property is not used in RMxprt design analysis, but it will be transferred to Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt.
T(1,1) T(2,2)
Note
This property is not used in RMxprt design analysis, but it will be transferred to Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
No core loss is to be calculated for this material. The following parameters appear:
Selecting Electrical Steel also enables the Calculate Properties for Core Loss Coefficient the pull-down list at the bottom of the dialog box. Selecting the Core Loss Coefficient opens the BP Curve window. Power Ferrite The following parameters appear:
Cm X Y
Selecting Power Ferrite also enables the Calculate Properties for Core Loss versus Frequency pull-down list at the bottom of the dialog box. Selecting the Core Loss versus Frequency opens the BP Curve window.
2. 3.
Or in the project tree, you can also right-click Materials, and select Edit All Libraries.
The Edit Libraries window appears. Click Add Material. The View/Edit Material window appears. In the Core Loss Type row, select Electrical Steel from the Value pull-down list. This enables the Calculate Properties for pull-down menu at the bottom of the dialogue box with the following two choices:
Calculate Properties for: Core Loss at One Frequency Calculate Properties for: Core Loss versus Frequency
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Note
Import the curve from a saved file. Enter the coordinates manually. The accuracy in inputting the data for B-P Curve for the electrical steel material has significant effect on the correctness of the analyses to the electromagnetic characteristics of the electric machine. You should input the data for B-P Curve according to the accurate data provided by the manufacturers of materials.
3. 4.
Select the units in which the B-P curve is measured from the Core Loss Unit pull-down list. Type values and select units for the following:
5.
The following parameters are dynamically updated with both the specified unit and the standard unit (w/m^3) as the input data changes. Kh -Hysteresis Kc - Classical Eddy Ke - Excess
Click OK. The View/Edit Material dialog box reappears. The property values fro Kh, Kc, and Ke are updated as new default values.
pv = ph + pc + pe = K1 Bm + K2 Bm
2 1.5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
p c = k c ( fB m )
the hysteresis loss is
2 p h = k n fB m
and the excessive loss is
p e = k e ( fB m )
Therefore
1.5
K1 = kh f + Kc f K2 = ke f 1.5
2 2 d k c = ----
where is the conductivity and d is the thickness of one lamination sheets. Minimize the quadratic form to obtain K1 and K2.
2 1.5 err ( K 1, K 2 ) = p vi K 1 B mi + K 2 B mi i
= min
where Pvi , Bmi the i-th point of the data on the loss characteristics curve. The other two loss coefficients are obtained as
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2 K1 kc f 0 k h = -------------------------f 0 K2 k e = ----------1.5 f 0
where f0 is the testing frequency for B-H Curve. Related Topics: Calculating Properties for Core Loss (BP Curve) for Maxwell Core Loss Coefficients for Electrical Steel Core Loss Coefficient Extraction Core Loss Type for a Maxwell Material
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3. 4.
Using the Edit area, Add frequency points at which a dataset is available for the Core Loss. For each Dataset added, click the Edit Dataset button to launch the Edit Dataset dialog. Add Dataset information for the frequency by manually entering the data or importing the data from a table. Click OK to accept the dataset and return to the Core Loss versus Frequency dialog. Continue adding dataset information until all frequencies have datasets defined. Click OK when all frequencies have valid data to complete the core loss calculation and return to the View/Edit Material dialog.
5.
pv = ph + pc + pe
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2 2 1.5 = k h fB m + k c ( fB m ) + k e ( fB m )
Minimize the quadratic form to obtain kh , kc and ke directly.
ni
err ( k h, k c, k e ) =
i = 1j = 1
where m - the number of loss curves, ni - the number of points of the i-th loss curve, and Pvij = f(fi , Bmij) - two dimensional lookup table for multi-frequency loss curves.
2. 3. 4.
Using the Edit area, Add frequency points at which a dataset is available for the Core Loss. For each Dataset added, click the Edit Dataset button to launch the Edit Dataset dialog. Add Dataset information for the frequency by manually entering the data or importing the data from a table. Click OK to accept the dataset and return to the Core Loss versus Frequency
Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-13
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
dialog. Continue adding dataset information until all frequencies have datasets defined. 5. Click OK when all frequencies have valid data to complete the core loss calculation and return to the View/Edit Material dialog.
x y p v = Cm f B m
or
c = log ( C m )
Minimize the quadratic form to obtain c, x and y.
m err ( c, x, y ) =
ni
i = 1j = 1
where m - the number of loss curves, ni - the number of points of the i-th loss curve, and Pvij = f(fi , Bmij) - two dimensional lookup table for multi-frequency loss curves. Then Cm is calculated from the equation above.
Stacking Factor - takes a simple value Stacking Direction - a drop down menu lets you select V(1), V(2), or V(3).
Note
This property is not used in RMxprt design analysis, but it will be transferred to Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Br
Hc
In many applications, however, the permanent magnet's behavior can be approximated using a linear relationship between B and H. In these cases, there is no need to create a nonlinear material. Simply enter the appropriate values of Br or Hc for the material when defining its properties.
In addition, a non-linear demagnetization curve can be modeled by the following four parameters:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
coercive field force Hc maximum energy product (BH)max relative recoil permeability r
Maxwell provides a tool to create a nonlinear demagnetization curve directly from these four parameters. 1. 2. Selecting Nonlinear for Relative Permeability enables the pull-down list Calculate Properties for: Nonlinear Permanent Magnet at the bottom of the dialog box. Selecting Nonlinear Permanent Magnet opens the dialog box Properties for Nonlinear Permanent Magnet as shown:
3.
Input the specified four parameters and click OK. Maxwell will create a lookup table based on the Four-Parameter Curve Fitting algorithm, and update the coordinates of the BH curve automatically as long as the input data of four parameters pass the validation check.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
fields. Mu (enabled by default) Hc (enabled by default) Provide a value. Coercive field force Hc in the units specified. Provide a value and select units from the drop down menu.
Br/Mp (disabled by default) Checking this enables the radio buttons that let you specify either Br or Mp. Br Residual flux density Br, in Tesla. If enabled, provide a value and select units from the drop down menu. Mp If enabled, provide a value and select units form the drop down menu.
3.
Click OK to close the dialogue and return to the View/Edit Materials window.
The values for Relative Permeability and Magnitude under Magnetic Coercivity are updated as new default values. Note The accuracy in inputting the characteristic parameters for the permanent-magnetic material has significant effect on the correctness of the analyses to the electromagnetic characteristics of the electric machine. It is suggested that users should input the characteristic parameters of the permanent-magnetic material according to the accurate data provided by the manufacturers of materials. RMxprt provides a few characteristic parameters of permanent-magnetic materials for reference.
Hysteresis Loop
The permanent-magnetic material belongs to hard-magnetic material. It is characterized with "fat" hysteresis loop, which encloses large area as shown in the figure. When magnetized, it keeps high magnetic property with the external magnetic field removed, therefore is used in the permanentmagnet electric machine to produce magnetic field. The characteristics of the permanent-magnetic material are represented with its main parameters: residual flux density Br, coercive field force Hc and maximum magnetic energy product (BH)max.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Demagnetization Curve
The part of the maximum hysteresis loop of the permanent-magnetic material in the second quadrant is called the demagnetization curve as shown in the next figure. It is the basic characteristics curve of the permanent-magnetic material. On the demagnetization curve, the magnetic flux density has positive values, but the magnetic field intensity has negative values. It means that the permanent-magnetic material is applied with demagnetization magnetic field intensity. Since Hm and Bm are in opposite directions, when the magnetic flux goes through the permanent-magnetic material, the magnetic potential difference along the direction of the magnetic flux does not drop, but
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
rises. Therefore, the permanent-magnetic material is a magnetic source, similar to the electric source in the electric circuit.
The two extreme positions on the demagnetization curve are the two significant parameters to represent the magnetic characteristics of the permanent-magnetic material. On the demagnetization curve, the value of the magnetic flux density corresponding to zero magnetic field intensity H is termed residual flux density Br, on the other hand, the value of the magnetic field intensity corresponding to zero magnetic flux density B is termed coercive field force Hc. The produce of the magnetic flux density and the magnetic field intensity at any point on the demagnetization curve is termed magnetic energy product (BH), which is proportional to the magnetic energy density possessed by the permanent magnet at the given operating situation. At the two extreme positions (B = Br, H = 0) and (B = 0, H = Hc), the magnetic energy product is equal to zero. Somewhere at an intermediate position, the magnetic energy reaches its maximum value and is termed maximum magnetic energy product (BH)max, which is another significant parameter to represent the magnetic characteristics of the permanent-magnetic material. To some permanent-magnetic materials with linear demagnetization curve, it is obvious that at (B = Br / 2, H = Hc / 2), the magnetic energy product reaches its maximum value, i.e. (BH)max = Br Hc / 4.
Recoil Lines
The relationship between the magnetic flux density and the magnetic field intensity represented by the demagnetization curve only exists when the magnetic field intensity varies in the same direction. In fact, when the permanent magnet electric machine is working, the demagnetization field intensity varies repeatedly in both directions. When demagnetization field is applied to the magne-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
tized permanent magnet, the magnetic flux density decreases along the curly segment BrP on the demagnetization curve as shown in the figure
. If the external demagnetization field intensity Hp is removed when the magnetic flux density reaches the point P, the magnetic flux density will increase not along the original demagnetization curve, but along another curve PVR. If the external demagnetization field intensity is reapplied, the magnetic flux density will decrease along the new curve RUP. By repeatedly applying the demagnetization field intensity, a localized loop is formed and is termed local hysteresis loop. On the local hysteresis loop, the rising segment and the dropping segment are quite close to each other, therefore can be approximated by the straight line PR, which is termed recoil line with P as the starting point. If demagnetization field with intensity Hq not exceeding the original value Hp is applied thereafter, the magnetic flux density will vary reversibly along the recoil line PR. If Hq > Hp, the magnetic flux density drops to a new starting point Q. It will vary along the new recoil line QS, but not the previous one PR. This sort of irreversible variation in magnetic flux density causes instability in the characteristics of electric machines and complicates the design computation of permanent magnet electric machines, therefore should be avoided as possible.
r =
1 B 0 H
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
If the demagnetization curve is curly, the value of r depends on the location of the starting point and is a variable, but typically varies within a small range. Therefore, it is approximated as a constant and is taken as the slop of the tangent to the point (Br, 0) on the demagnetization curve. In other words, the recoil lines at different starting points are approximated as a family of parallel lines, which are all parallel to the tangent to the point (Br, 0) on the demagnetization curve.
Inflection Point
Some permanent-magnetic materials, such as some ferrite permanent-magnetic materials, show straight upper segment on the demagnetization curve. When the demagnetization field intensity drops to a given value, the demagnetization curve turns to decrease rapidly. The turning point is termed inflection point. If the demagnetization field intensity does not exceed the inflection point k, the recoil line coincides with the straight segment on the demagnetization curve. If the demagnetization field intensity exceeds the inflection point k, the new recoil line RP no longer coincides with the straight segment on the demagnetization curve.
Some permanent-magnetic materials, such as most of the rare-earth permanent-magnetic materials, show straight demagnetization curve in the whole range. In those cases, the recoil line coincides with the demagnetization curve. This makes the magnetic property keep stable while the permanent-magnet electric machine is working. This is the best ideal demagnetization curve for electric machine applications.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Hc H a = -----a
and
Br B a = ----a
where a<1. Any magnetic flux density B in the interval
0 B Br
corresponds to the magnetic field intensity H:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
dB -----dH
B = Bm
Br = -----Hc
Solving yields:
Br B m = -----------------------1+ 1a
and
Hc H m = -----------------------1+ 1a
Let the magnetic energy product at the point equal to (BH)max be:
Br Hc B m H m = -------------------------------- = ( BH ) max 2 (1 + 1 a)
Solving yields:
a = 2
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3. 4.
Find the virtual magnetic flux density Br0. With Br0, Hc, and (BH)max, draw the demagnetization curve with the three-parameter curve fitting technique. The curve should touch the ideal recoil line at the tangent point (Ht, Bt). Any magnetic flux density B in the interval
0 B Br
4-24 Working with Materials in RMxprt
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
B r0 B ------------------------ Hc B a B r0 o H = B Bt H t + ------------- r o
1.
B Bt B Bt
The virtual magnetic flux density Br0 is found by iteration: Start from the initial guess for the lower and the upper bounds for the virtual magnetic flux density Br0:
B0 + B1 B r0 = ------------------2
3. With Br0, Hc, and (BH)max, draw the demagnetization curve with the three-parameter curve fitting technique.
a0 = 2
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4.
The curve should touch a line parallel to the ideal recoil line at the tangent point (Ht, Bt).
B r0 a0 = 0 B t = B r0 r 0 H c ( 1 a 0 )B r0 a0 > 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------a0
and
B r0 B t H t = H c -------------------------B r0 a 0 B t
5. For any magnetic flux density B in the interval
0 B Br
the corresponding magnetic field intensity H will be calculated by:
B r0 B ------------------------ Hc B a B r0 o H = B Bt H t + -------------r o
6.
B Bt B Bt
Br Bt H r = H t + ----------------r 0
7. If Hr>0, the assumed virtual Br0 is too small, the lower bound of the interval needs to be increased, so let B0=Br0. If, however, Hr<0, the assumed Br0 is too big, the upper bound of the interval needs to be decreased, so let B1=Br0. Repeat steps (2) through (7) until Hr converges to 0 within satisfactory precision.
8.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Conductor Data
When a material is assigned to a machine part, RMxprt checks that the material is appropriate for the machine part based upon whether it is a conductor or other material type. RMxprt distinguishes conductors based on material threshold settings. RMxprts treatment of conductors may be set by the used by adjusting the Material Threshold.
Note 4.
If you want these values to be the default, change the values by clicking the Tools>Options>RMxprt Options menu and setting the material thresholds in the RMxprt Options dialog. Click OK.
5.
Simple: For this type, you must type a simple value for the property value. Anisotropic: For this type, you must specify material properties for three principal directions: a. b. c. T(1,1) T(2,2) T(3,3)
Note 2.
The Anisotropic type is not used in RMxprt design analysis, but it will be transferred to Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5
Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings
Specify how RMxprt computes a solution by adding a solution setup to the design. You can define more than one solution setup per design. To add a solution setup to a design: 1. 2. Select a design in the project tree. Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Add Solution Setup.
Alternatively, right-click Analysis in the project tree, and then click Add Solution Setup on the shortcut menu. Includes general solution settings, including rated output power, speed, operating temperature, etc.
The Solution Setup dialog box appears. It is divided among the following tabs: General
<machine type> Included settings specific to the selected machine type. 3. 4. Click the General tab. If available for the machine you are using, select an Operation Type from the pull-down list. This may be Motor or Generator. When you OK the selection, this makes a difference in the Load Type available. 5. Select a Load Type from the pull-down list. For Motor operation, this comes from the following:
Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque Fan Load
If the model has an Operation Type, and you select Generator, the Load Type options are the
Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings 5-1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
following: Infinite Bus or Independent Generator. 6. 7. 8. 9. Type the Rated Output Power, and select the units. Type the Rated Voltage, and select the units. Type the Rated Speed, and select the units. Type the Operating Temperature, and select the units. The options vary depending on the machine. For example, the 3 Phase Induction Motor includes options for:
10. Click the <machine type> tab (if any for this machine).
Frequency and Units Winding Connection (Wye or Delta). Rated Power Factor Winding Connection (Wye or Delta) Exciter Efficiency Input Exciting current and units
The Brushless DC Motor does not use the <machine type> tab. 11. Specify the desired settings, based on the machine type you have selected. 12. Click OK. Note To edit a setup after it has been created, right-click the specific setup (for example, Setup1), under Analysis in the project tree, and then click Properties on the shortcut menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To create a design sheet based on a previously-customized template after the design has been analyzed: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export. The Export dialog box appears. Select Customized Design Sheet from the Type pull-down menu. Choose the Solution Setup from the pull-down menu. In the Path field, enter the location to export the files to, or use the ellipsis (...) button to browse to the desired location. Click OK.
RMxprt will connect to Microsoft Excel according to the set path and automatically import the relevant data from Design Output into a copy of the customized Design Sheet Template. Specific data not available in Design Output is shown as N/A, for instance, RS in Slot Sizes is N/A (mm) when stop type is 1. The post-processing of data is automatically performed, for instance, Winding Weight is 0.947 (kg). Note Several Design Sheet examples are shipped with RMxprt in the examples subdirectory of your installation.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
In the Design Output, "Rated Output Power", "Rated Voltage", "Number of Poles", "Frequency", "Frictional Loss", etc. are all key words of output data. To resort to those key words into Microsoft Excel worksheet, the corresponding data in the Design Output should be import into the worksheet.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
In the template, the yellow-colored areas are reserved for importing data.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
winding weight = number of slots number of conductors per slot number of parallel wires length of half turns of coil sectional area of wire specific weight of wire
In the following figure, the formula is entered into the relevant cell as: =H7*D30*D31*D36*3.14*D32*D32*0.0078/4
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6
Running an RMxprt Simulation
After you specify how RMxprt will compute the solution, begin the solution process. 1. 2. Select a solution setup in the project tree. Click RMxprt>Analyze.
To run more than one analysis at a time, follow the same procedure while a simulation is running. The next solution setup will be solved when the previous solution is complete. To solve every solution setup in a design: 1. 2. In the project tree, under the design you want to solve, select Analysis. Click RMxprt>Analyze All. Each solution setup is solved in the order it appears in the project tree.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Right-click in the Progress window, and select Abort from the shortcut menu. The analysis stops immediately.
If you aborted the solution in the middle of an adaptive pass, the data for that pass or current frequency point is deleted. Any solutions that were completed prior to the one that was aborted are still available.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7
Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt
When RMxprt has completed a solution, you can display and analyze the results in the following ways:
View solution data. Specify output variables. Export a model to be used in Maxwell2D, Maxwell 3D, or SIMPLORER. Create a Customized Design Sheet
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data. Right-click Results in the project tree, and then click Solution Data on the shortcut menu. Right-click Setup1 in the Project tree, and then click Solution Data on the shortcut menu. Click the Solution Data button on the toolbar. Solution Data - this contains a Data field with a drop-down menu that allows you to view many different data tables, which vary with the machine type.
Full Load Operation Material Consumption No Load Operation Permanent Magnet Rotor Data Stator Slot Stator Winding Steady State Parameters
Parameters - if you have defined parameters for the project, this tab displays them, and shows their calculated values. Design Sheet - this displays the contexts of the .res file for the current setup. The file contains tables with information for such things as (depending on the machine type):
1. 2.
General Data Stator Data Rotor Data Permanent Magnet Data Material Consumption Steady State Parameters No Load Magnetic Data Full Load Data Winding Arrangement Transient FEA Input Data Right-click the design sheet. The shortcut menu appears. Select Print from the shortcut menu.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Print dialog box appears. 3. Select the printer, and click OK to print.
Curves - this displays the plots that were automatically generated by the solver. You can select these from a drop down menu (the menu contents vary with the machine type):
1. 2. 3.
Input DC Current vs Speed Efficiency vs Speed Output Power vs Speed Output Torque vs Speed Cogging Torque in Two Teeth Induced Coil Voltage at Rated Speed Air Gap Flux Density Induced Winding Phase Voltage at Rated Speed Winding Currents Under Load Phase Voltage Under Load Right click on the designed plot to display the pop-up menu. Click Print on the menu to display the Print dialog. Select the printer, and click OK to print.
To open the Solution Data dialog box directly on the Curves tab, click the Curves toolbar button.
3.
Click OK to accept your selection and close the dialog. From the Solution dialog, you can select and delete solutions.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Output Variables section, where you can specify the name and expression for a new output variable. Calculation section, where you can insert quantities together with the associated function into the Expression area of the Output Variables section. Function section, where you can insert a function into the Expression area of the Output Variables section.
Click Add to add the new variable to the list. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add additional variables. When you are finished adding output variables, click Done to close the Output Variables window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3. 4.
Click in the Expression area. To insert a quantity: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. From the Design pull-down list, select the design from which you want to select the quantity. From the Report Type pull-down list, select the type of report from which you want to select the quantity. From the Solution pull-down list, select the solution from which you want to select the quantity. From the Category list, select the type of quantity you want to enter. From the Quantity list, select the quantity. From the Function list, select a ready-made function (this option is the same as inserting the function from the Function section). If applicable, from the Domain list, select the solution domain. Click Insert Quantity Into Expression. The selected quantity is entered into the Expression area of the Output Variables section.
5.
To insert a function: a. b. In the Function section, select a ready-made function from the pull-down list. Click Insert Function. The function appears in the Expression area of the Output Variables section.
6. 7. 8.
When you are finished defining the variable in the Expression area, click Add to add the new variable to the list. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to add additional variables. When you are finished adding output variables, click Done to close the Output Variables window.
Note
Remember the evaluated value of an expression is always interpreted as in SI units. However, when a quantity is plotted in a report, you have the option to plot values in units other than SI.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3. 4. 5. 6.
Select the setup you want to export from the Solution Setup pull-down list. Optionally, click the Variation ellipsis (... ) button to specify a Design Variation to use during project export. Specify the Path to store the project files in by clicking the Path ellipsis (...) button and browsing to the desired directory. Click OK.
You can now open the model in the product to which you exported it, and perform other kinds of analyses. Related Topics:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3. 4. 5.
Select the setup you want to export from the Solution Setup pull-down list. Optionally, click the ... button to specify a Variation. For Maxwell 2D Design export:
6.
Select the Auto Setup radio button to have the complete design including boundaries and excitations automatically created in the current project. Unselect the Auto Setup radio button to create only the model in the Maxwell Design.
Click OK.
You can now work with the model in the Maxwell2D or Maxwell3D design, add boundaries and excitations, and perform analyses, and analyze results.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Under the X tab, specify the quantity to plot along the x-axis in one of the following ways:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The first (primary) sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab will be plotted along the xaxis.
8. 9.
Clear the Use Primary Sweep option, and then select the Category, Quantity, and Function of the quantity to plot on the x-axis. The quantity will be plotted against the primary sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab.
Under the Sweeps tab, confirm or modify the sweep variables that will be plotted. Click Add Trace. A trace represents one or more lines connecting data points on the graph. The trace is added to the traces list at the top of the Traces dialog box. Each column lists an axis on the report and the information that will be plotted on that axis.
10. Optionally, add another trace by following the procedure above. 11. Click Done. The function of the selected quantity is plotted against the swept variable values or quantities you specified on an x-y graph. The plot is listed under Results in the project tree. Related Topics
Under the Y tab, specify the information to plot along the y-axis in one of the following ways:
Clear the Use Secondary Sweep option, and then select the Category, Quantity, and Function of the quantity to plot on the y-axis. The quantity you select will be plotted against the secondary sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab.
Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 25-11
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
8.
Under the X tab, specify the information to plot along the x-axis in one of the following ways:
9.
Select Use Primary Sweep. The first (primary) sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab will be plotted along the xaxis. Clear the Use Primary Sweep option, and then select the Category, Quantity, and Function of the quantity to plot on the x-axis. The quantity you select will be plotted against the primary sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab.
Under the Sweeps tab, confirm or modify the swept variables that will be plotted. A trace represents one or more lines connecting data points on the graph. The trace is added to the traces list at the top of the Traces dialog box. Each column lists an axis on the report and the information that will be plotted on that axis.
11. Optionally, add another trace by following the procedure above. 12. Click Done. The function of the selected quantity or quantities is plotted against the values you specified on an x-y-z graph. The plot is listed under Results in the project tree. Related Topics
Under the X tab, select the values you want to plot the quantity against in one of the following ways:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The quantity you selected in step 5 will be displayed against the first (primary) sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab.
8. 9.
Clear the Use Primary Sweep option, and then select the Category, Quantity, and Function of the quantity to plot against the quantity you selected in step 5. This quantity will be plotted against the primary swept variable listed under the Sweeps tab.
Under the Sweeps tab, confirm or modify the swept variables that will be plotted. Click Add Trace. In the context of a data table, a trace represents a quantity's value at another quantity's value or at selected swept variable values. The trace is added to the traces list at the top of the Traces dialog box.
10. Optionally, add another trace by following the procedure above. 11. Click Done. The quantity you selected in step 5 is listed at each variable value or additional quantity value you specified. The data table is listed under Results in the project tree. Related Topics
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Select the trace you want to remove from the traces list, and then click Remove Trace. Click Remove All Traces.
You can now type the quantities to plot in the appropriate axes boxes. Related Topics
Click the Name box for the primary sweep variable, and then click the variable name you want to be the primary sweep variable.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To modify the secondary sweep variable or any additional sweep variable, follow the same procedure. To modify the values that will be plotted for a variable: 1. 2. Click a variable in the table. To the right, all of the possible values for the selected variable are listed. Select All Values. All of the selected variable's values are plotted.
Alternatively, clear All Values and select the specific values to plot against the selected quantity.
deriv(quantity) implicitly implies derivative over the primary sweep deriv(quantity, SweepVariable) explicitly means derivative over the sweep variable specified in the second argument (such as "Freq"). Absolute value Arc cosine Hyperbolic arc cosine Angle (phase) of a complex number, cut at +/-180 Angle in radians Arc sine Hyperbolic arc sine Arc tangent Hyperbolic arc tangent Average of first parameter over the second parameter Absolute value of average.
You can select from the following functions in the Function list: abs acos acosh ang_deg ang_rad asin asinh atan atanh avg avgabs
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
cang_deg
Cumulative angle (phase) of the first parameter (a complex number) in degrees, along the second parameter (typically sweep variable). Returns a double precision value cut at +/-180. Cumulative angle of the first parameter in radians along a second parameter (typically a sweep variable) Returns a double precision value. Conjugate of the complex number. Cosine Hyperbolic cosine Peak/RMS (root mean square) for the selected simulation quantity 20*log10(|x|) 10*log10(|x|) +30 10*log10(|x|) Derivative of first parameter over second parameter. Returns 1 if integer part of the number is even; returns 0 otherwise Exponential function (the natural anti-logarithm) Returns root mean square RMS/Mean Absolute Value for the selected simulation quantity. Returns the integral of the absolute deviation of the selected quantity from a target value that is entered via the additional argument. To use this function, you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the
Error category.
cang_rad conjg cos cosh crestfactor dB(x) dBm(x) dBW(x) deriv even exp formfactor iae
Imaginary part of the complex number Truncated integer function Integral of the selected quantity. Uses trapezoidal area.. Absolute value of integral. Returns the integral of the squared deviation of the selected quantity from a target value that is entered via an additional argument. To use this function, you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the
Error category.
itae
Returns the time-weighted absolute deviation of the selected quantity from a target value that is entered via an additional argument.To use this function, you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the
Error category.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
itse
Returns the time-weighted squared deviation of the selected qty from a target value that is entered via an additional argument.To use this function, you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the Error
category.
j0 j1 ln log10 lsidelobex lsidelobey mag max max_swp min min_swp nint normalize odd overshoot per pk2pk
Bessel function of the first kind (0th order) Bessel function of the first kind (1st order) Natural logarithm Logarithm base 10 The x value for the left side lobe: the next highest value to the left of the max value. The y value for the left side lobe: the next highest value to the left of the max value. Magnitude of the complex number Maximum of magnitudes. Maximum value of a sweep. Minimum magnititude. Minimum value of a sweep. Nearest integer Divides each value within a trace by the maximum value of the trace. ex. normalize(mag(x)) Returns 1 if integer part of the number is odd; returns 0 otherwise Obtains the peak overshoot over a point (double argument) Calculates period. Peak to peak. Difference between max and min of the first parameter over the second parameter. Returns the peak-to-peak value for the selected simulation quantity. Returns the ratio of the peak to peak-to-average for the selected quantity. Period max. Period minimum Period Root Mean Square. Pulse fall time of the selected simulation quantity according to the 90%10% estimate.
pulsefront9010 Pulse front time of the selected simulation quantity according to the 10%90% estimate.
Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 25-17
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
pulsefront3090 Pulse front time of the selected simulation quantity according to the 30%90% estimate. pulsemax pulsemaxtime pulsemin pulsemintime pulsetail50 Pulse maximum from the front and tail estimates for the selected simulation quantity. Time at which the maximum pulse value of the selected simulation quantity is reached. Pulse minimum from the front and tail estimates for the selected simulation quantity. Tiime at which the minimum pulse value of the selected simulation quantity is reached. Pulse tail time of the selected simulation quantity from the virtual peak to 50%.
pulsewidth5050 Pulse width of the selected simulation quantity as measured from the 50% points on the pulse front and pulse tail. PulseWidth Functions pw_plus pw_plus_max pw_plus_min pw_plus_avg pw_plus_rms Pulse width of first positive pulse Max. Pulse width of input stream Min. Pulse width of input stream Average of the positive pulse width input stream RMS of the positive pulse width input stream
pw_minus_max Max. Pulse width of input stream pw_minus_min Min. Pulse width of input stream pw_minus_avg Average of the negative pulse width input stream pw_minus_rms RMS of the negative pulse width input stream polar re rect rem ripple rms rmsAC Converts the complex number in rectangular to polar Real part of the complex number Converts the complex number in polar to rectangular Fractional part Returns the ripple factor (AC RMS/Mean) for the selected quantity. Returns total root mean square of the selected quantity. Returns the AC RMS for the selected quantity.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
rsidelobex rsidelobey sgn sin sinh sqrt tan tanh Undershoot XAtYMax XAtYMin XAtYVal
The x value for the right side lobe: the next highest value to the right of the max value. The y value for the right side lobe: the next highest value to the right of the max value. Sign extraction Sine Hyperbolic sine Square root Tangent Hyperbolic tangent Obtains the peak undershoot over a point (double argument). Threshold crossing time: report first time (x value) at which an output quantity crosses YMax. Threshold crossing time: report first time (x value) at which an output quantity crosses a user definable threshold (YMin). Returns the X value at the first occurance of Y value.
xdb10beamdwi Width between left and right occurrences of values x db10 from max. Takes 'x' dth as argument (3.0 default). To use this function, you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the Radiation category. xdb20beamwidt Width between left and right occurrences of values x db20 from max. Takes 'x' as argument (3.0 default) To use this function, you need to open the Add Trace h Characteristics dialog and select the Radiation category. y0 y1 YAtXMax YAtXMin YatXVal Bessel function of the second kind (0th order) Bessel function of the second kind (1st order) Threshold crossing time: report first time (y value) at which an output quantity crosses XMax. Threshold crossing time: report first time (y value) at which an output quantity crosses a user definable threshold (XMin). Returns the Y value at the first occurance of X value.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To select a parameter, variable, or quantity to plot: 1. In the Traces dialog box, select one of the following categories: Variables User-defined project or design variables.
Output Variables Derived quantities RMxprt project or design variables, parameters or solution curves. 2. Select a quantity to plot from the Quantity list. The available quantities depend on the selected category and the setup of the design.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Description Report voltages in the machine coil. Report currents for each line or phase of the machine, source current, line current, armature current. Report flux density in the machine air gap, flux linkages. Report Induced Line and Phase voltages. Report miscellaneous quantities specific to the machine type such as power factor, torque to current ratio. Report machine efficiency. Report air gap power, output power. Report cogging torque, output torque, magnet generated torque, induction torque. Report Line and Phase voltage.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Angle Inductance
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
8
Specifying RMxprt Winding Data
To define the winding data for an RMxprt machine 1. In the project tree, under Machine, open the folder that requires a winding, and double-click Winding.
2. 3.
For some machine types this would be Machine>Rotor>Winding, for others, Machine>Stator>Winding. You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.
The specific properties available depend on the specific machine. The following machine types have winding data available:
Three-Phase Induction Motors (stator winding) and (rotor winding) Three-Phase Synchronous Machines (stator winding) and (rotor winding) Brushless PMDC Motors (stator winding) Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines (stator winding) PMDC Motors (rotor winding) Switched Reluctance Motors (stator winding) Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors (stator winding) Universal Motors (stator winding) and (rotor winding) General DC Machines (rotor winding) Claw-Pole Alternators (stator winding)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
When you edit the AC winding of a new design for the first time, RMxprt creates a default winding arrangement based on the basic winding specifications: Number of Phases, Number of Poles, Number of Slots, Winding Layers, Conductors per Slot, and Coil Pitch. Then you can edit the winding configuration based on the default arrangement.
Selections for the DC Permanent Magnet Motor (rotor winding) and Universal Motor include (stator winding) and (rotor winding): Lap
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2.
Wave Lap Wave Frogleg Editor - enable the Winding Editor Lap - 90 deg phase belt 2-layer coil for both single and double layer Sin_1 - first class sinusoidal coil four double layer only Sin_2 - second class sinusoidal coil four double layer only
The Switched Reluctance motor does not involve winding selections. Select the Winding Type and click OK. This closes the window and sets the Winding Type property. If you select the Editor type, It also enables the Machine>Edit Layout command on the menu bar.
2.
Select Editor as the Winding Type and click OK. This closes the Winding Type selection window and sets the Winding Type Value to Editor. It also enables the command Machine>Winding>Edit Layout on the menu bar. Now the Machine Editor window displays the default
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
winding arrangement.
3.
Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. This displays the dialog box Winding Editor as shown. The dialog box Winding Editor includes functions that do not appear in the tab sheet Winding Editor in the RMxprt Machine Editor window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4.
Out Slots
Machine>Winding>Connect All Coils Upon executing, the graphical display in the main window shows the connections. Machine>Winding>Disconnect All Coils Upon executing, the graphical display in the main window updates to remove the connection.
Related Topics
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Three-phase Induction Motor Three-phase Synchronous Motor Three-phase Synchronous Generator Permanent-magnet Synchronous Generator Line-start Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor Adjustable-speed Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor Brushless Permanent-magnet DC Motor Claw-pole Alternator
You input data for Number of Poles in the Machine Properties window and data for the Number of Slots and Slot Type in the Stator Properties window. You set the Number of Slots in the Winding Properties window. RMxprt automatically arranges the winding layout and display the relevant information that has been specified in the Winding Editor tab of the RMxprt main window. As long as the edited winding data have been saved, the Winding Editor tab will display the last saved winding data whenever Winding Editor dialog is launched. The left top part of the Winding Editor tab shows the winding data, as does the Winding Editor dialog. In this area, the total number of rows equals half the number of slots. Enabling the Winding Editor Dialog Setting the Winding Type property to Editor enables the Machine>Edit Layout command on the menu bar. To display the Winding Editor dialog: 1. Open the Winding Properties window and set the Winding property to Editor. To do this, double-click on the Winding property button to display the Winding Type selection window. 2. Select Editor as the Winding Type and click OK. This closes the Winding Type window and sets the Winding Type property to Editor. It also enables the Machine>Edit Layout command on the menu bar. 3. Click Machine>Edit Layout. This displays the Winding Editor dialog. The Winding Editor dialog box includes functions that do not appear in the RMxprt main window Winding Editor tab. You can also invoke the Winding Editor dialog by: a. b. c. Right-click on the data table section of the Winding Editor tab of the main window. This displays an Edit Layout button. Click the Edit Layout button to display the Winding Editor dialog.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
You can also display the Winding Editor dialog by: a. b. Right click in the Winding Editor tab main window display. This displays a shortcut menu. Click Edit Layout from the shortcut menu. Each row of the winding data is identified with coil index in the Coil column. This information is displayed in the Winding Editor tab in the RMxprt Main window, and it editable in the Winding Editor dialog.
Column Phase is for the phase to which the coil belongs. Column Turns is for the number of turns of coil. Column In Slots is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing in ('flow-in-side' for short). If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window, the slot number ends with a "T" to show the top layer. Column Out Slots is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing out ('flow-out-side' for short). If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window, the slot number ends with a "B" to show the bottom layer.
By changing the belonging phase in column Phase, the number of turns in column Turns, the flowin-side slot number in column In Slot, the flow-out-side slot number in column Out Slot for each coil, it is possible to arrange the distribution of coils of single and double layer winding of any type required. The Winding Editor dialog also includes three check boxes:
Periodic Multiplier: indicates the possibility to select the number of unit machines for editing winding arrangement. It has a drop-down menu to show the possible numbers for the periodic multiplier. When checked, the pull-down list box to the right displays the numbers of unit machines for selection. Selecting 1 means whole slots are considered as one unit machine, and all coils is listed in the table of the edit window. Selecting 2 lists half of the total coils in the table, and whole slots are divided into two unit machines, etc. When the check box Periodic Multiplier: is unchecked, the pull-down list box to the right is grayed (enabled); all the coils are listed in the table.
Constant Turns. Checking the check box (multiple choices) Constant Turns indicates that the number of turns keeps constant and the column Turns in the table is grayed (disabled). If the check box Constant Turns is unchecked, the column Turns in the table is brightened allowing for editing and modifying the number of turns.
Constant Pitch Checking this box grays the Out Slots column to the values cannot be edited. It means that the coil pitch is constant. For two-layer windings, all flow-in-side slots are defined as top layer, and all flow-out-side slots as bottom layer. The flow-out-side slot number is automatically computed based on the input in the edit box Coil Pitch in Stator2 page in RMxprt window, and Out Slot column is disabled.
Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
When the check box Constant Pitch is unchecked, the column Out Slot is enabled to allow arbitrarily changing slot pitch for each coil. The Winding Editor dialog includes three command buttons.
Click the command button Default in the window Winding Editor, all the data in the table resumes to the situation of data from automatic arrangement by RMxprt. Click the command button Reset in the window Winding Editor, all the data in the table resumes to the situation of data when the window Winding Editor was first opened, or resumes to the data that you have saved. Click OK to accept the current values and close the Winding Editor dialog.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Winding The coils or coil sets of a phase are connected according to certain rules to form a phase winding. A phase may consist of several branches connected in parallel. Every branch must produce exactly the same back emf and must have the same resistance. As a result, the phase winding current is uniformly distributed among all branches. In summary, a winding may be connected with several branches in parallel; each branch consists of one or more coil sets connected in series; a coil set may have several series coils; a coil is wound with a number of turns; a turn is formed by two conductors; a conductor may be stranded by one or more same- or different-size wires.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Whole-coiled Windings
When the coils of an AC winding are connected so that there are as many coil sets per phase as there are poles, the winding is called "whole-coiled." Whole Coiled Single Layer Whole Coiled Double Layer
Half-coiled Windings
When the coils are connected so that there is only one coil set per phase per pair of poles, the winding is called "half-coiled." Half Coiled Single Layer Half Coiled Double Layer
Single-Layer Windings
All the conductors in one slot are connected in series with all the conductors in another slot to form a single-layer coil. You set the number of winding layers in the Winding properties window, Winding tab. Comparing to double-layer type, this type is characterized by
Number of coils halved; No need for insulation between layers, therefore higher slot filling factor; Coil pitch depends on the connection, and is not adjustable;
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
According to different layouts of the end winding, single-layer windings are classified as chain-, lap-, concentric- and crossed-types. Chain-type Windings The name single-layer chain-type is from the linked chain-like developed winding diagram. For a chain-type winding, every coil set has only one coil. Half-coiled Chain-type Winding An example of three-phase 6-pole 18-slot single-layer half-coiled chain-type winding is shown in the following figure.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Whole-coiled Chain-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot single-layer whole-coiled chain-type winding is shown in the following figure.
Lap-type Windings
The name single-layer lap-type is from the lapped layout of end connection. In a lap-type winding, at least one coil set has 2 or more coils which are overlapped each other. If some coil sets have only one coil, this winding type is also called "crossed lap-type".
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half-coiled Lap-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot single-layer half-coiled lap-type winding is shown in the figure on the left, and an example of three-phase 8-pole 36-slot single-layer half-coiled crossed laptype windings is shown in the following figure on the right.
Whole-coiled Lap-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 48-slot single-layer whole-coiled lap-type winding is shown on the left, and an example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed lap-type winding is shown on the right1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Concentric-type Windings
In a concentric-type winding, at least one coil set has 2 or more coils and non coils are overlapped each other. If some coil sets have only one coil, this winding type is also called "crossed concentrictype". The single-layer concentric-type is formed of coils with different coil pitch, but with the same central line and of concentric-circle-like, therefore is named concentric-type. Its end connection can be arranged in layers, and therefore is convenient to imbed into slots. Nevertheless, the end magnetic leakage is a bit bigger. Half-coiled Concentric-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot single-layer half-coiled concentric-type winding is shown on the left, and an example of three-phase 8-pole 36-slot single-layer half-coiled crossed concentric-type winding is shown on the right.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Whole-coiled Concentric-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 48-slot single-layer whole-coiled concentric-type winding is shown on the left, and an example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed concentric-type winding is shown on the right.
Double-Layer Windings
In this type, the conductors in a slot are arranged in upper and lower layers. One side of each coil is imbedded in the upper layer in one slot and the other side is imbedded in the lower layer in another slot. You set the number of winding layers in the Winding properties window, Winding tab. Comparing to single-layer-type, this type is characterized by:
Number of coils doubled; Need for insulation between layers, therefore lower slot filling factor, and danger in electric breakdown between phases; Adjustable coil pitch, therefore possible weakening of harmonic emfs with proper short pitch factor to improve electromagnetic properties of electric machines; Being widely used in electric machines with capacity over 10 kW.
For the single speed electric machine, the double-layer winding typically adopts whole-coiled type. For the double speed electric machine with doubling number of poles, the double-layer winding is whole-coiled in high speed, half-coiled in low speed. According to different coil shapes, double-layer windings are classified as lap-, concentric- and wave-types.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Double-layer Lap-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot whole-coiled double-layer lap-type windings (short pitch y = 5) is shown below.
Double-layer Concentric-type Winding An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot whole-coiled double-layer concentric-type windings (short pitch y = 5) is shown below.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Double-layer Wave-type Winding The name double-layer wave-type is from the wave-like developed winding diagram as shown below.
Compared to lap-type:
The winding of each phase connects the coils under different poles in series in one round, and returns to the left to the first coil, then winds the next round, and so on so forth until all the coils belonging to this phase are connected. This type is usually used in single-turn preformed hard coil for low voltage high current electric machines. This type needs less connection wire between poles.
Fractional-Pitch Winding
First, introduce a number q, called number of slots per pole per phase, which is defined as
q=
q = b
c d
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
q=2
=7
1 2 ) is shown here.
Auto-arrangement of AC Windings
RMxprt can arrange these windings automatically if all coils have the same number of turns. This section describes the process to automatically arrange the coil distribution.For winding layout display in RMxprt, the lap-type is default if windings are automatically arranged. If a concentric-type layout display is desired, the winding can be defined by winding editor, as described in the next section. The wave-type winding is effective to a lap-type winding, and is also displayed as a lap-type winding. Star Vector Diagram The conductors (or coils) in slots produce emf (or mmf), which can be expressed with unit vector. When the electric machine has number of pole p, and number of slots Z, the angular phase difference in electric degrees between two contiguous slots is
p 180 Z
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Drawing the vectors of emfs (or mmfs) in all the slots according to their phase angles forms the star vector diagram of the winding. The figure below shows an example of the star vector diagram of 4pole 24-slot winding.
If there exists the greatest common factor t between the number of slots Z and the number of pole pairs pp (= p/2), the star vector diagram repeats t times, i.e. the winding has t periods. Let Z Z0 = t , and
p0 =
p t ,
then Z0 and p0 construct a complete star vector diagram and form a unit electric machine. For the whole-pitch winding electric machine (q, as shown later, is an integer), t = p/2. For the fractionalpitch winding electric machine, Z c q= =b+ mp d where m is the number of phases. If t > 1, the angular phase difference between two contiguous vectors is 360 = Z0 and the difference between the ordinal numbers of the slots of two contiguous vectors is m(bd + c )G 1 y0 = d where G is a minimum integer to make y0 equal to an integer (y0 should take into account the possible reverse connection of coils under the contiguous pole).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Phase Spread
In the star vector diagram of a unit electric machine, the range occupied by the vectors of each phase under one pole is termed phase spread, expressed in electric degrees or number of slots. For a single-layer winding, the phase spread is 180/m (m the number of phases). The phase spread of a double-layer half-coiled winding is 360/m, and the phase spread of a double-layer full-coiled winding is 180/m. The phase spread of a 2-phase winding is always 90 (= 180/m). Therefore, a 2-phase winding cannot take the double-layer half-coiled winding type. The windings for single-phase induction motor are also considered as 2-phase windings. When the number of phases is an even number of greater than or equal to 4, the phase spread is always 360/m. Therefore, a winding with even number of phases (4, 6, ) can take only the double-layer half-coiled winding type. When the number of phases is an odd number of greater than or equal to 3, the phase spread can be either 360/m or 180/m. Therefore, a winding with odd number of phases (3, 5, ) can take any winding types.
Coil Arrangement
Coil arrangement is completed by the following processes. First, draw the star vector diagram based on number of slots and number of poles. Then divide the whole region (360 electric degrees) to several phase spreads, which is derived from the number of phases and the winding type. Finally, assign all phase spreads to each phase in such a way that the axis of each succeeded phase lags by 360/m electric degrees (90 electric degrees for 2 phases).
Double-layer Windings
Take a three-phase winding as an example. The width of phase spread of half-coiled winding is 360o / 3 = 120o, the sequence of the phase spread is A, B, C. For whole-coiled winding, the width of phase spread is 180o / 3 = 60o, the sequence of phase spread is A, C, B, A, C, B, where the phase spread with negative sign is termed negative phase spread.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The winding types can be set in the Winding Type panel for a machine that includes these options (in this case, a brushless permanent magnetic DC motor), for double-layer whole-coiled windings as shown in on the left and double-layer half-coiled windings as shown on the right.
The star vector diagram of a three-phase whole-coiled (60o-phase-spread) winding is shown below on the left, and that of a half-coiled (120o phase spread) winding is shown below on the right.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Single-layer Windings
The winding layers can be set in the properties window for the winding, for single-layer wholecoiled windings as shown on the left and single-layer half-coiled windings as shown on the right.
The phase spread of a three-phase single-layer whole-coiled or half-coiled winding is 60o, and the star vector diagram is the same as the double-layer whole-coiled winding.
Fractional-pitch Windings
The number of slots per pole per phase of fractional-pitch winding is a mixed number. c d In the unit electric machine, the numbers of slots occupied by phase spread are not all the same, but repeat with the radix d. In each d poles, there are c poles with the slot number of phase spread equal to b + 1 (big phase spread), d c poles with the slot number of phase spread equal to b (small phase spread). q=b Take as an example a three-phase 10-pole 36-slot fractional-pitch winding with phase spread of 60. The number of slots per pole per phase of fractional-pitch winding is q= 36 1 =1 3 10 5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
the greatest common factor between the number of slots 36 and the number of pole pairs 5 is t = 1, the angular phase difference between two contiguous vectors in the star vector diagram is 360 o = 10 o 36 the difference between the ordinal numbers of the slots of two contiguous vectors is (G = 2)
3(1 5 + 1) 2 1 =7 5 the repetition radix d = 5. In each 5 pole region, each phase has big phase spread of 1 + 1 = 2 slots under 1 pole, and small phase spread of 1 slot under 4 poles. The repeating format is 2 1 1 1 1 for phase A. The repetition of phase spread distribution for all phases is shown in the following table. y0 =
1~2 A 19~20 A
3 C 21 C
4 B 22 B
5 A 23 A
6 C 24 C
7~8 B 25 B
9 A 27 A
10 C 28 C
11 B 29 B
12 A 30 A
13~14 C 31 C
15 B 33 B
16 A 34 A
17 C 35 C
18 B 36 B
Asymmetric Windings
Whole-pitch windings (q is integer) are always symmetric. Fractional-pitch windings with c q=b d
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
becomes asymmetric if the denominator d is a multiple of the number of phases m. In general, it is avoid using asymmetric windings as possible. Nevertheless, it is sometime possible to design polyphase windings with little asymmetry in order to use existing punching tools. If d is a multiple of the number of phases m, but the total number of slots Z can be divided by m, it is possible to construct poly-phase winding with little asymmetry. RMxprt can perform automatic arrangement for this sort of windings and obtain the phase-spread in electric degrees for each phase. Take as an example a three-phase 6-pole 66-slot fractional-pitch winding electric machine. Since
66 2 =3 36 3 d = m = 3, the winding is asymmetric. The output in the window Design Output is shown below. q=
The information for WINDING ARRANGEMENT is displayed as follows: The distribution of coil slots to phases: The 3-phase, 2-layer winding can be arranged in 66 slots as below: AAAAZZZZBBBXXXXCCCCYYYAAAZZZZBBBBXXXCCCCYYYYAAAAZZZBBBBXXXXCCCYYYY X, Y and Z stands for A, -B and C, respectively. For asymmetric windings, additional information is output, as shown below. The winding factors of each phase are: Phase A Phase B Phase C 0.954119 0.954119 0.949042
The angles between two-phase winding axes are: Phase A & B Phase B & C Phase C & A 119.082 120.459 120.459
If a sinusoidal rotating field links the winding, the fundamental induced-voltage components will be: Positive-sequence component Negative-sequence component Zero-sequence component 100% 0.286577% 0.639823%
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Coil Connections
Connection of Double-layer Lap Windings
Every vector represents the top-layer effective side of a coil. The bottom effective side of the coil is determined based on the coil pitch, and is not displayed in the diagrams. Therefore, every vector in the diagrams can also stand for a coil. Connect all coils in phase spread of A in positive direction, and all coils in phase spread of A in negative direction to form the phase A winding. In this way, phase B and C windings can also be connected. The winding connection layouts for the vector diagrams are shown below.
Every vector in A, B and C phase spread represents "go" effective side of a coil, the "return" effective side of the coil is located in A, B and C phase spread. For the lap type connection, all coils
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
are with full coil pitch. The connection layouts of the lap type and the concentric type, with respect to the same vector drawing are shown below.
In the previous example, for the concentric type (lower right in the diagram), if coil 1 is not connected from slot 1 to slot 8 (long coil pitch: coil pitch = 7 > pole pitch = 6), but connected from slot 1 to slot 20, and slot 8 to slot 13, all coils of phase A winding have coil pitch of 5. In this way, the winding becomes single-layer whole-coiled type with the same star vector diagram and phase spread, and has much shorter average coil pitch. Therefore, single-layer whole-coiled windings consume less electromagnetic wire than single-layer half-coiled windings. RMxprt can optimize connections to minimize the average coil pitch to form a single-layer whole-coiled winding.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
An example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed lap-type winding (q = 3, 60o phase-spread) is shown below.
An example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed concentric-type winding (q = 3, 60o phase-spread) is shown below.
A star vector diagram with fractional coil pitch can also be connected with single-layer wholecoiled type. When the number of slots per pole per phase q <2, as shown in the following vector diagram, the number of coil sets per phase may not equal to the number of poles (6 coils vs 10
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
poles), but the algorithm to connect coils is the same (minimize the average coil pitch), and therefore, it is still referred as whole coiled windings.
The winding connection layout for the previous vector diagram is shown below.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Another example is an asymmetric three-phase winding. The connection layout is shown below.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
1 A A
2 A A
3 A A
4 A A
5 C C
6 C C
7 C C
8 C C
9 B B
10 B B
11 B B
12 B B
13 A A
14 A A
15 A A
16 A A
17 C C
18 C C
19 C C
20 C C
21 B B
22 B B
23 B B
24 B B
The connection for variation of number of poles is shown in the next figure. On the top-left is the 2pole 2Y-connection at high speed, on the top-right is the 4-pole -connection at low speed.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
DC Windings
Lap Winding
yk = m a = mp
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Wave Winding
The winding layout of a wave-type winding for dc machines is as shown below.
Commutator pitch
yK =
Frog-leg Winding
A frog-leg winding consists of a lap winding and a wave winding. Assume the lap winding has m multiplex number. In order to connect the wave winding in parallel with the lap winding, the wave winding should have the same branch bake emf as the lap winding. Therefore, the number of branches in parallel of the wave winding has to be the same as that of the lap winding, or the multi-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
plex number of the wave winding must be mp/2. The winding layout of a frog-leg-type winding with m=1 for dc machines is as shown below.
y1a + y1b =
Commutator pitch
2K = integer p 2K = integer p
y Ka + y Kb = yKa = m y Kb =
2K mm p
where
m
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Virtual Slots
Windings of the dc machine are usually double-layer type. In many cases, often a number of coil sides are imbedded into one slot for simplification of structure. Therefore, the number of slots Z is less than the number of coils S. There exists the relationship S Z=
where is the number of coil sides in each layer in one slot and is termed virtual slot factor. Therefore, the number of conductors per slots is equal to multiple of 2.
Equipotential Connectors
The points ideally possessing the same electric potential in armature winding are often wholly or partly connected by short copper wire, which is termed equipotential connector.
Equipotential Connector Class A of Simplex-lap Winding
Asymmetry in magnetic circuit, such as eccentric air-gap, causes circulating current in lap winding, increases losses and affects commutation in order. The equipotential connector Class A on the commutator of simplex-lap winding can solve this problem. The connection pitch of equipotential connector Class A of simplex-lap winding yp is equal to the number of commutator segments per pole pair. K K yp = = = integer p a Winding with yp = integer is termed symmetric winding. Only symmetric winding can have equipotential connector Class A.
No need for Equipotential Connector for Simplex-wave Winding
Simplex-wave winding does not possess electrically equipotential points, therefore, can not have equipotential connector. On the other hand, simplex-wave winding does not need equipotential connector.
Equipotential Connector Class B of Multiplex-wave Winding
There are electric equipotential points among different sets of simplex-wave windings of multiplex-wave winding. They can be connected to eliminate the nonuniform distribution of electric potential on commutator segments due to inequality of brush resistances. This is termed equipotential connector Class B. The connection pitch of equipotential connector Class B of multiplex-wave winding yp is equal to the number of commutator segments per branch pair in parallel.
yp =
K = integer a
For multiplex-lap winding, equipotential connector Class A is needed for each set of simplex-lap windings, equipotential connector Class B is needed among different sets of simplex-lap windings. There exist no electrically equipotential points among different sets of simplex-lap windings on the
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
commutator side of armature, however, there exist electrically equipotential points among different sets of simplex-lap windings on different sides of armature as points A and B in the figure below.
For frog-leg winding, each pair of electrically equipotential points on commutator is connected by a lap coil and a wave coil in series. The connection acts as equipotential connector Class A for lap winding and as equipotential connector Class B for wave winding. Therefore there is no need for extra equipotential connectors.
Pole Windings
The following two types of electric machines possess similar pole winding structure:
DC machine (motor and generator) Three-phase synchronous machine (motor and generator)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
RMxprt adopts the same arrangement procedure for pole windings of the two types of electric machines. There are three types of structure as shown in the figure below: Round Wire
Cylinder Coil
Edgewise Coil
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Overall Width
Overall Height, Overall Width and Winding Clearance can be input from RMxprt panel. If either Overall Height or Overall Width is set to 0, RMxprt perform automatic space optimization to obtain the maximum space for pole winding arrangement in the condition to guarantee the clearance between pole windings.
If the space from input or determined by space optimization is not sufficient to arrange for the input number of turns per pole, a message of "The rotor/shunt/series/commutating winding control dimension is not big enough." is displayed in Design Output window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
With auto-arrangement of pole windings, RMxprt calculates maximum number of layers, minimum number of layers, maximum number of turns per layer, minimum number of turns per layer, and the maximum number of turns per pole that is available from the limited space, and so forth.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Cylinder Coil
The arrangement of magnetic-pole winding with rectangular wire wound in standing way by RMxprt is shown below.
The cylinder coil is wound with half-turn over lapped layer by layer. Layers with the same number of turns constitute a section. The output window Design Output displays the number of layers and the number of turns per layer of each section, and the maximum number of turns per pole that is available from the limited space.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Edgewise Coil
The arrangement of magnetic-pole winding with rectangular wire wound in flatting way by RMxprt is shown below.
To guarantee the clearance between two adjacent pole windings, the wire width of the lower parts is decreased, while the wire thickness is increased to keep the sectional area of wire invariant as possible. The turns with the same wire gauge constitute a section (maximum three sections are allowed). The output window Design Output displays the number of turns of each section and the sizes of wire gauge, and the maximum number of turns per pole that is available from the limited space.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
with equal conductor number at both pole sides. Therefore, the two terminal leads of one pole coil are at the same axial side (or at different pole sides), as shown below.
When the number of turns per pole includes a half turn, the number of conductors per pole is an odd number. In this case, one pole side has one more conductor than the other pole side, and the two terminal leads of one pole coil are at different axial sides (or at the same pole side), as shown below.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9
RMxprt Machine Types
Using RMxprt, you can simulate and analyze the following eleven machine types:
Three-Phase Induction Motors Single-Phase Induction Motors Three-Phase Synchronous motors and generators Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motors Adjust-Speed Synchronous motors and generators Permanent-Magnet DC Motors Switched Reluctance Motors Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors Universal Motors General DC motors and generators Claw-Pole Alternators Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
General data, such as the voltage, speed, and materials. Stator data, such as the slot types, diameter, and wire dimensions. Rotor data, such as the slot dimensions, skew, and ventage holes. Solution data, such as rated output voltage and frequency.
By option, you can add vents to and remove an existing vent from the stator and rotor.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
They vary with the rotor slip s. All rotor parameters have been referred to the stator side.
Figure 1
Figure 2
In the exciting branch, Xm is the magnetizing reactance, and RFe is the resistance corresponding to iron-core losses. Xm is a linearized nonlinear parameter that varies with the saturation of the main field. After a phase voltage U1 is applied to the phase terminals, stator phase current I1 and rotor current I2, which has been referred to the stator, can be easily computed by the circuit analysis. The electromagnetic power Pm, or air-gap power, is computed by the following:
Pm = 3 * I2^2 * R2/s
where Tfw is the frictional and wind torque. The output power is:
P2 = T2 * 2
where Pfw, Pcu2, PFe, Pcu1, and Ps are frictional and wind loss, rotor copper loss, iron-core loss, stator copper loss, and stray loss, respectively. The power factor is derived from:
PF = P1/(m * U1 * I1)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. 11. Choose File>Save to save the project. 12. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once the design is analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design. Please refer to the Three-Phase Induction Motor Problem application note, on the technical support page of the Ansoft web site, for a specific example of a three-phase induction motor problem.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
produced in the iron by distortion of the magnetic flux by the load current. The IEEE Standard provides different assumed stray load loss values for AC motors rated less than 2500 hp, as follows:
4. 5. 6. 7.
Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. Click OK to close the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
a. b. c. 7. 8.
Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. Select the Slot Type: a. b. Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
Note
c. 9.
10. Enter the thickness of the magnetic end pressboard in the Pressboard Thickness field. Enter 0 for a non-magnetic end pressboard. 11. Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field. 12. Click OK to close the Properties window.
The outer diameter of the stator core. The inner diameter of the stator core. The length of the stator core. The stacking factor of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The number of slots the stator core contains. The type of slots in the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The number of lamination sectors. The magnetic press board thickness (0 for a non-magnetic press board). The skew width measured in slot number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Bs2
Rs
Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button, an outline of the selected winding appears. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description One A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. You need to set up the winding arrangement layer for each slot. winding Editor A one-layer whole-coiled winding:
Whole Coiled
Slot 123
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half Coiled
Slot 123
Two A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select for winding layers the you Layer can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot in the Winding Editor. Winding Editor A two-layer whole coiled winding:
Whole Coiled
Slot 123
The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where m is the phase number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half Coiled
Slot 1 2 3
For a two-layer winding, if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor, only the top layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding, click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 5. 6. 7.
Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automat-
8. 9.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10. Select the Wire Size: a. b. c. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window.
11. Click the End/Insulation tab. 12. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 13. Do one of the following:
If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
14. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 15. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 16. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field. 17. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. 18. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 19. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. 20. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. 21. Click OK to close the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units, wire type, diameter, and gauge. Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. When this check box is selected, the End Adjustment field appears instead. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils, which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. Base Inner The inner radius of the base corner. Radius Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Factor
The coil pitch measured in number of slots. The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5.
4. 5.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
Choose Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6.
When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Note
The vent icon appears in the project tree under the stator. To remove a vent to stator in a three-phase induction motor. 1. Select the stator icon in the project tree. 2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Remove Vent. The vent icon disappears in the project tree under the stator. The Vent data for the stator includes the following fields.
Vent Ducts Duct Width
Magnetic Spacer Width Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. 0 for non magnetic spacer Duct Pitch
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
b.
Note
The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. b. c. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
Enter the Skew Width, measured in rotor slot pitch. This value defines by how much the rotor bars are skewed. 10. Optionally, select Cast Rotor to allow the conductor to fill all the space available in the slot. Otherwise, RMxprt assumes the slot wedge that fixes the bars is filled with insulator material in a 2D/3D geometry model. 11. Optionally, select Half Slot to draw only half of the rotor slots. 12. Optionally, select Double Cage to specify the winding as a double-squirrel-cage winding. If you select Double Cage, another line appears in the properties to let you specify the Bottom Slot type. a. Click on the Custom button on the Double Cage row. This displays the Select Slot Type window. The Select Slot Type window appears. b. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4).
Note
9.
When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The stacking factor of the rotor core. The number of slots the rotor core contains. The type of slots in the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The skew width measured in slot number. Select or clear this to specify whether the rotor squirrel-cage winding is cast or not. Select this to specify a half-shaped unsymmetrical slot. Select this to specify the winding as double-squirrel-cage.
A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Bs1 Bs2 Rs
A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
2.
Enter the length of the gap between the end ring and the iron core in the End Length field. This field specifies the value for only one end of the gap, not both. Enter the end ring dimension in the axial direction in the End-Ring Width field. The end ring connects the bars of the rotor to one another. Enter the end ring dimension in the radius direction in the End-Ring Height field. The end rings height covers at least the cross section of the rotor conductor. Select an End Ring Conductor Type for the rotor winding end ring: a. b. c. Click the button for End Ring Conductor Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a conductor type from the list, or define a new conductor type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
7.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields: The type of bar conductor used in the winding. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The length of the single-side end of the extended bar. The width of one side of the end rings in the axial direction. The end ring connects the bars of the rotor to one another. End Ring Height The height of the end rings in the radian direction. The end ring connects the bars of the rotor to one another. End Ring The type of end ring conductor used in the winding. Click the button to Conductor Type open the Select Definition window.
Bar Conductor Type End Length End Ring Width
Magnetic Spacer Width Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. 0 for non magnetic spacer Duct Pitch Holes per row Inner hole diameter Outer hole diameter Inner hole location Outer hole location
Center to center distance between vent ducts Number of axial vent holes per row. Diameter of vent holes in inner row. Diameter of vent holes in outer row. Center to center diameter of inner hole vents Center to center diameter of outer hole vents.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click the Three-Phase Induction Motor tab.
RMxprt Machine Types 9-21
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6. 7.
Enter the electrical line frequency in the Frequency field, and select the units. Select the Winding Connection from the following options:
8.
Related Topics:
On the General tab. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. On the General tab. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power. On the General tab. Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units. On the General tab. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units. On the General tab. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units. On the General tab. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units. On the Three-Phase Induction Motor tab. Type a value for the frequency, and select the units. On the Three-Phase Induction Motor tab. Select from Wye or Delta.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
General data, such as the voltage, speed, and materials used in the motor. Stator data, such as the slot types, diameter, and wire dimensions. Rotor data, such as the slot dimensions, skew width, and ventage holes. Solution data, such as rated output voltage and frequency.
By option, you can add a vent or remove a vent from the rotor.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
negative-sequence components, and auxiliary-phase negative-sequence components are shown in (a), (b), (c), and (d) of Figure 3, respectively.
Figure 3
In the figures, R1m, X1m, R1a, X1a, R2, X2, and Xm are main-phase stator resistance, main-phase stator leakage reactance, auxiliary-phase stator resistance, auxiliary-phase stator leakage reactance, rotor resistance, rotor leakage reactance, and magnetizing reactance, respectively. XC is the reactance of the capacitor connected in series with the auxiliary winding, and the coefficient k is the ratio of effective turns of the auxiliary winding to that of the main winding. R2, X2, and Xm have been referred to the main winding. The equivalent impedance of the four circuits is Zm1, Za1, Zm2, and Za2, as shown in the figures. According to the symmetric component method, the positive and negative components of auxiliaryphase currents can be expressed in the form of a phasor as the following:
Ia1 = (j / k)Im1 Ia2 = ((j / k)Im2 Because the main winding and the auxiliary winding have the same applied terminal voltage U1, the voltage equations for both windings become the following: U1 = Um1 + Um2 = Im1Zm1 + Im2Zm2 U1 = Ua1 + Ua2 = Ia1Za1 + Ia2Za2 = (j / k)(Im1Za1 - Im2Za2)
The positive and negative components of main-phase current are calculated by the following:
Im1 = U1(Za2 - jkZm2) / (Zm1Za2 + Zm2Za1) Im2 = U1(Za1 + jkZm1) / (Zm1Za2 + Zm2Za1) The total input current is: I1 = Im + Ia = (Im1 + Im2) + (Ia1 + Ia2)
9-24 RMxprt Machine Types
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Based on these two components of main-phase current, all current components shown in Figure 3 can be obtained by simple computation. Then the total input current is:
I1 = Im + Ia = (Im1 + Im2) + (Ia1 + Ia2) The positive- and negative-sequence air-gap power can be computed in the following way: Pm1 = 2 * Irm1^2 * R2 / s Pm2 = 2 * Irm2^2 * R2 / (2 - s)
Tm, T2, P2, P1, and eff are computed in the same way as for three-phase induction motors. The power factor is derived from:
PF = P1 / (U1 * I1)
10. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. 11. Choose File>Save to save the project. 12. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once the design is analyzed, the model can be imported into the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design.
RMxprt Machine Types 9-25
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Please refer to the A Capacitor-Run Single-Phase Induction Motor Problem application note, on the technical support page of the Ansoft web site, for a specific example of a single-phase induction motor problem.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. Select the Operation Mode: a. b. Click the button. The Select Operation Mode window appears. Select from one of the following:
C-Run Capacitance-run mode. The capacitor is in series with the auxiliary winding. In the Capacitor run mode, the capacitor will be designed (if the auto-design mode is selected) to minimize the backward magnetomotive force. C-Start Capacitance-start mode. The auxiliary winding is in series with the capacitor and is disconnected when the rotor reaches the switching speed. C-R&S Capacitance-run and start mode. Two capacitors are in series with the auxiliary winding; one for starting, one for running. R-Start Resistor-start mode. The auxiliary winding is disconnected when the rotor reaches the switching speed.
c. 8.
Click OK to close the Select Operation Mode window and return to the Properties window.
Enter values in the following capacitance, resistance, and switching speed fields:
Run Capacitance Available for C-Run, C-R&S Run Resistance Available for C-Run, C-R&S
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Start Capacitance Available for C-Start, C-R&S Start Resistance Available for C-Start, C-R&S Switching Speed Available for C-Start, C-R&S, R-Start
9.
If the start winding needs to be optimized, select the Objective Type from the following three options:
Note
(Tst/Ist)max. Accept the defaults. This is the ratio of the maximum starting torque to the starting current ratio. (Tst)max. Enter the given start current ratio. This is the maximum starting torque (Ist)min (minimum starting current). Enter the given start torque ratio.
The start-winding optimization goal is disabled for the C-Run operation mode. In capacitor-run mode, the capacitor is designed to minimize the backward magnetomotive force. For other modes, if the auto-design function is active, the capacitor and the resistance are designed according to the start goal, selected from the following:
The maximum value of (Starting Torque/Starting Current). The maximum starting torque. The minimum starting current.
The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Single Phase Induction Motor). The number of poles the machine contains. Select whether the rotor is an Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor. The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. The given speed of reference. Click the button to select from the following four modes: C-Run, C-Start, C-R&S, and R-Start. The capacitance of the run capacitor. Available for C-Run and C-R&S operation modes. The resistance of the run capacitor. Available for C-Run and C-R&S operation modes. See Note below.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Start Capacitance The resistance of the start capacitor. Available for C-Start and C-R&S operation modes. Start Resistance The resistance of the start capacitor. Available for C-Start and C-R&S operation modes. Switching Speed The switching speed of the capacitor or resistor. Available for C-Start, CR&S, and R-Start operation modes. Objective Type If the start winding needs to be optimized, select from the following three objective types: (Tst/Ist)max, (Tst)max, or (Ist)min.
For (Tst/Ist) max, accept the defaults. This is the ratio of the maximum starting torque to the starting current ratio. For (Tst) max, enter the Given Start Current Ratio. This is the maximum starting torque. For (Ist) min (minimum starting current), enter the Given Start Torque Ratio.
The start-winding optimization goal is disabled for the C-Run operation mode.
Note
If the value of the Run Resistance is zero in RMxprt, the value of the Run Resistance will be autocomputed in Maxwell to a value of 1% of the capacitor reactance. To neglect the Run Resistance in Maxwell, set the value to a small non-zero number in RMxprt.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
b. c. 7. 8.
The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. Select the Slot Type: a. b. Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
Note
c. 9.
The outer diameter of the stator core. The inner diameter of the stator core. The length of the stator core. The stacking factor of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The number of slots the stator core contains. The type of slots in the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4.
Bs2
Rs
Always available. Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
Slot Insulation
4. 5. 6.
Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. Select or clear the Include Series Winding check box. This option sets whether or not to include the series winding in the speed adjustment. When this option is selected, a third tab, Series (C), appears in the Properties window. Enter the number of layers in the Winding Layers field. Enter the number of slots in the Coil Pitch field.
RMxprt Machine Types 9-31
7. 8.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
9.
Select a Winding Type: a. Click the button for Winding Type. The Winding Type window appears. b. Select from one of the following three types of winding:
When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button, an outline of the selected winding appears. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. You need to set up the winding One-Layer Winding arrangement for each slot. Editor A one-layer whole-coiled winding:
Whole Coiled
Slot 123
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half Coiled
Slot 123
A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select 2 Winding layers, the Winding Winding Editor is enabled, where you can specify a different winding arrangement for Editor each slot. A two-layer wave winding:
Whole Coiled
Slot 123
The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where m is the phase number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half Coiled
Slot 1 2 3
For a two-layer winding, if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor, only the top layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch.
Slot 123
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
A first-class sinusoidal coil. The Conductors per Layer field defines the maximum number of conductors in the slot. The software will determine the winding distribution in the slots to get the sinusoidal current distribution: A second-class sinusoidal coil. The Conductors per Layer field defines the maximum number of conductors in the slot. The software will determine the winding distribution in the slots to get the sinusoidal current distribution. A first-class concentric coil:
Slot 123
You must define the distribution of conductors per slot. A second-class concentric coil:
Slot 123
You must define the distribution of conductors per slot. The available winding types vary with the slot type that is selected. c. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding, click OK to close the Winding Type
RMxprt Machine Types 9-35
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
window and return to the Properties window. 10. Click the Main (A) tab. 11. Enter the end length adjustment of the main stator coil in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
12. Enter the number of conductors per layer of main winding in the Conductors per Layer field. 13. Enter the number of parallel branches in the main stator winding in the Parallel Branches field. 14. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design the value. 15. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
a. b. c.
Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window.
17. Click the Aux (B) tab. 18. Enter the end length adjustment of the auxiliary stator coil in the End Adjustment field. 19. Enter the number of conductors per layer of auxiliary winding in the Conductors per Layer field. 20. Enter the number of parallel branches in the auxiliary stator winding in the Parallel Branches field. 21. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design the value. 22. WIRE WRAP 23. WIRE SIZE 24. Click the Series (C) tab. (This tab only appears when Include Series Winding is selected on the Winding tab.) 25. Enter the end length adjustment of the series winding in the End Adjustment field. 26. Enter the number of parallel branches in the series stator winding in the Parallel Branches field. 27. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design the value.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
28. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automat-
ically obtain this value from the wire library. 29. Select the Wire Size: a. b. c. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Winding tabSlot Liner The thickness of the slot liner. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Factor Include Series Select or clear to specify whether or not to include the series winding in the speed adjustment. When this option is selected, a Winding third tab, Series (C), appears in the Properties window. Winding Layers The number of winding layers. Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. Winding Type The type of stator winding for the main phase. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled, Half Coiled, and Editor. Main (A) End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils. Conductors per The number of conductors per layer in the main winding. Layer Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the main stator winding. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 for auto-pickup from the wire library). Wire Size The wire diameter (0 for auto-design). End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the auxiliary winding. Conductors per The number of conductors per layer in the auxiliary winding. Layer Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the auxiliary stator winding. Number of The number of wires per conductor in the auxiliary winding (0 for auto-design). Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 for auto-pickup from the wire library). Wire Size The wire diameter (0 for auto-design). This tab appears when Include Series Winding is selected on the Winding tab. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the series winding. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the series winding.
Aux (B)
Series (C)
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The number of wires per conductor in the series winding (0 for auto-design). The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 for auto-pickup from the wire library). The wire diameter (0 for auto-design).
5.
9-40 RMxprt Machine Types
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4. 5. 6.
Choose Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Note
Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. b. c. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
9.
Enter the Skew Width, measured in rotor slot pitch. This value defines by how much the rotor bars are skewed.
RMxprt Machine Types 9-41
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10. Optionally, select Cast Rotor to allow the conductor to fill all the space available in the slot. Otherwise, RMxprt assumes the slot wedge that fixes the bars is filled with insulator material in a 3D/3D geometry model. 11. Click OK to close the Properties window.
The stacking factor of the rotor core. The number of slots the rotor core contains. The type of slots in the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The skew width measured in slot number. Select or clear this to specify whether the rotor squirrel-cage winding is cast or not.
A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
2.
Enter the length of the gap between the end ring and the iron core in the End Length field. This field specifies the value for only one end of the gap, not both. Enter the end ring dimension in the axial direction in the End-Ring Width field. The end ring connects the bars of the rotor to one another. Enter the end ring dimension in the radius direction in the End-Ring Height field. The end rings height covers at least the cross section of the rotor conductor. Select an End Ring Conductor Type for the rotor winding end ring: a. b. c. Click the button for End Ring Conductor Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a conductor type from the list, or define a new conductor type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
7.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Bar Conductor Type End Length End Ring Width End Ring Height End Ring Conductor Type
The type of bar conductor used in the winding. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The length of the single-side end of the extended bar. The width of one side of the end rings in the axial direction. The height of the end rings in the radian direction. The type of end ring conductor used in the winding. Click the button to open the Select Definition window.
The vent icon appears in the project tree under the rotor. To remove a vent from a rotor in a three-phase induction motor. 1. Select the rotor icon in the project tree. 2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Remove Vent. The vent icon disappears in the project tree under the rotor. The Vent data for the stator includes the following fields.
Holes per row Inner hole diameter Outer hole diameter Inner hole location Outer hole location
Number of axial vent holes per row. Diameter of vent holes in inner row. Diameter of vent holes in outer row. Center to center diameter of inner hole vents Center to center diameter of outer hole vents.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.
Fan Load
The speed remains constant in the motor. The output power remains constant in the motor. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click the Single-Phase Induction Motor tab. Enter the electrical line frequency in the Frequency field, and select the units. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.
Related Topics:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
On the General tab. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. On the General tab. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power. On the General tab. Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units. On the General tab. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units. On the General tab. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units. On the General tab. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units. On the Single-Phase Induction Motor tab. Type a value for the frequency, and select the units.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
General data, such as the voltage, speed, and circuit type of the model. Circuit data, such as lead trigger angle, transistor drop, and control circuit information. Stator data, such as the diameter, slot dimensions, and skew width of the stator. Stator Winding Rotor pole data, such as the associated permanent-magnet dimensions, air gap, and stacking factor. Solution data, such as rated output voltage and frequency.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Iq
Id
M
jI d Xad
Id
Iq
O
Figure 6.2 The phasor diagram for motors
In the figures, R1 and X1 are the resistance and the leakage reactance of the armature winding, Xad and Xaq are the d-axis armature reactance and the q-axis armature reactance, respectively. In the
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
phasor diagram, Xad is a linearized nonlinear parameter, and Xaq is a linear parameter. The d-axis synchronous reactance Xd and q-axis synchronous reactance Xaq are calculated directly from
X d = X 1 + X ad X q = X 1 + X aq
Let ? denote the power angle for a generator (the angle that U lags E0), or the torque angle for a motor (the angle that E0 lags U), then we have
I d X d + I q R 1 = ( U cos E 0 ) I d R 1 + I q X q = U sin
where the plus sign + is for the motor and the minus sign - is for the generator. Solving for Id and Iq yields
1 Id --- = tan Iq =
where the plus sign + is for the motor and the minus sign - is for the generator.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-49
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
P 1 = 3UI cos
The output mechanical power is
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P Cua + P Fe )
where Pfw, PCua, and PFe denote the frictional and wind, the armature copper and the iron-core losses, respectively. The output mechanical torque is
P2 T 2 = -----
where denotes the synchronous speed in rad/s. The efficiency of the motor is
P 1 = P 2 + P fw + P Cua + P Fe
where Pfw, PCua, and PFe denote the frictional and wind, the armature copper and the iron-core losses, respectively. The input mechanical torque is
P1 T 1 = -----
where denotes the synchronous speed in mechanical rad/s. The efficiency of the generator is
P2 ------ 100 = P1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
R1 + Ld Lq e 0 id vq eq = Ld e R1 + Lq 0 iq v0 e0 0 0 R1 + L0 i0 vd ed
where R1 is the armature winding resistance, Ld, Lq and L0 are the d-, the q- and the 0-axis inductances respectively, e is the revolution speed in electric radians per second, the differential operator is
d dt
The coordinate transformation equations for the terminal voltage, the induced emf and the armature winding current are
vd vq = C v0
va vb
M
ed eq = C e0
ea eb
M
ia
id
ib = C iq M i0
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The transformation matrices for the two-, the three- and the four-phase systems are C2, C3 and C4, respectively, as follows
C2 =
C3 =
1 -----2 2 1 -- cos ( ) sin ( ) -----3 2 1 cos ( 2 ) sin ( 2 ) -----2 cos cos C 4 = sin cos sin sin cos sin cos 0 0 0 0
where
2 = -- 3
The input electric power is obtained from the voltage and the current as:
T 1 p 1 = -- ( v d i d + v q i q + v 0 i 0 ) dt T 0
The output mechanical power is:
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P Cua + P Fe )
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
where Pfw, PCua, Pt and PFe denote the frictional and wind, the armature copper, the switching and the iron-core losses, respectively. The output mechanical torque is
P2 T 2 = -----
where denotes the revolution speed in mechanical radians per second. The efficiency of the electric machine is
P2 = ------ 100 % P1
10. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. 11. Choose File>Save to save the project. 12. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
DC: Switched DC voltage at the given input frequency. PWM: Pulse width modulation. When you select this source type, you must enter the following values in the Circuit Data Properties window: Modulation Index (the ratio of the sine wave amplitude to the triangular amplitude) and Carrier Frequency Times (the ratio of the triangular frequency to the sine wave frequency). AC: An AC excitation.
7.
Select a Circuit Type from the following types: Y3 Y-connected, three-phase. L3 Loop-type, three-phase. S3 Star-type, three-phase. C2 Cross-type, two-phase. L4 Loop-type, four-phase. S4 Star-type, four-phase. The circuit types are based on industry standards. By default, type Y3, a three-phase, six-status circuit, is selected as the circuit type.
Note
When you place the mouse cursor over a circuit type, an outline schematic of the circuit appears.
8.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine). Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. Rotor Position Select whether the rotor is an Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor. Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. Wind Loss The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. Reference Speed The given speed of reference. Control Type The way the circuit is controlled. Select from DC, PWM (pulse-width modulation), or AC. Circuit Type The drive circuit type. Click the button to open the Circuit Type window and select from the following six types:
Machine Type
Y3: Y-Type, 3-Phase L3: Loop-Type, 3-Phase S3: Star-Type, 3-Phase C2: Cross-Type, 2-Phase L4: Loop-Type, 4-Phase S4: Star-Type, 4-Phase
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
position. An angle of 0 means that the induced voltage in the triggered phase is at a maximum:
Note
A positive value represents a lead angle, and a negative value represents a lag angle.
3. 4. 5.
Enter the period from on-status to off-status of a transistor, in electrical degrees, in the Trigger Pulse Width field. Enter the voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on in the Transistor Drop field. Refer to the figures of the different circuit types in step 2. Enter the voltage drop of one diode in the discharge loop in the Diode Drop field. If you selected a star-type circuit (S3 or S4) as the Circuit Type, enter the total discharge voltage in this field. If you selected PWM as the Control Type, then enter values in the following two fields:
6.
7.
Modulation Index: The ratio of the sine-wave amplitude to the triangular amplitude. For PWM circuits. Carrier Frequency Times: The ratio of the triangular frequency to the sine-wave frequency. For PWM circuits.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. Select the Slot Type: a. Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
b.
Note
Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4).. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 9.
Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field.
2. 3. 4.
Bs2
Rs
Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
5.
The outer diameter of the stator core. The inner diameter of the stator core. The length of the stator core.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Stacking Factor Steel Type Number of Slots Slot Type Skew Width
The stacking factor of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The number of slots the stator core contains. The type of slots in the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The skew width measured in slot number.
Synchronous Machine
To define the stator windings and conductors: 1. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3. 4.
section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) Click the Winding tab. Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field. Select a Winding Type: a. b. Click the button for Winding Type. The Winding Type window appears. Select from one of the following three types of winding:
When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button, an outline of the selected winding appears. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description One A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. You need to set up the winding Layer arrangement for each slot. Winding Editor A one-layer whole-coiled winding:
Whole Coiled
Slot 123
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half Coiled
Slot 123
A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select 20, the Winding Editor Editor opens, where you can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot. A two-layer wave winding:
Whole Coiled
Slot 123
The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where m is the phase number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half Coiled
Slot 1 2 3
For a two-layer winding, if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor, only the top layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding, click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 5.
Select the Winding Type for the stator. When you place the mouse cursor over the winding type, a schematic of the selected winding appears.
Note
Winding types 10 and 20 are user-defined. If you select either of these, a window appears, asking you to define the name of the winding arrangement. The window closes when the user-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
defined winding is entered. Select from the following winding types: One- A user-defined single-layer winding arrangement. When you select this type, enter the Layer winding arrangement, and choose OK. Winding Editor A one-layer whole-coiled winding: 11
Slot 123
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
12
Slot 123
20 21
A user-defined winding arrangement. When you select this type, enter the winding arrangement, and choose OK. A two-layer wave winding:
Slot 123
The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where m is the phase number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22
A two-layer winding:
Slot 1 2 3
6. 7.
Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field.
Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. 8. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5. 9. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. 10. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
11. Select the Wire Size: a. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-65
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
b. c.
Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window.
12. Click the End/Insulation tab. 13. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 14. Do one of the following:
If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the con-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
15. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 16. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 17. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field. 18. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field.
Slot Insulation
19. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 20. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. 21. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. 22. Click OK to close the Properties window.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-67
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5.
4. 5. 6.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
Click Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Factor
Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. Select a Pole Type:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
a. b.
Note
Click the button. The Select Pole Type window appears. Click a button to select the desired pole type (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5). TIP: When you run the mouse over each option, the diagram changes to show that pole type. When you place the mouse cursor over a rotor type, an outline of the selected circuit type appears. Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 8.
The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The stacking factor of the rotor core. The pole type for the rotor. Click this button to open the Select Pole Type window and select from the following types: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
Some of the fields in the Rotor Pole window change, or are inactive, depending on the Rotor Type you select.
To define the rotor pole: 1. To open the Rotor Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. For all pole types except type 4, enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the max-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
imum possible arc distance in the Embrace field. This value is between 0 and 1.
For pole type 4, enter the shaft diameter of the rotor in the Shaft Diameter field. For pole types 1, 2, and 3, enter the distance from the center of the rotor to the polar arc center in the Offset field. Enter 0 for a uniform air gap.
Offset
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. For pole type 5, enter the thickness of the bridge across the two poles in the Bridge field. For pole type 5, enter the width of the rib supporting the bridge in the Rib field. Select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole from the Magnet Type pull-down menu. For pole types 4 and 5, enter the width of the magnet in the Magnet Width field. Enter the maximum radial thickness of the magnet in the Magnet Thickness field.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The pole embrace. For pole types 1, 2, 3, and 5. The shaft diameter of the rotor. For pole type 4. The pole-arc center offset from the rotor center (0 for a uniform air gap). For pole types 1, 2, and 3. The thickness of the bridge across two adjacent poles. For pole type 5. The width of the rib at the center of two adjacent poles that support the bridge. For pole type 5. The type of magnet. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. For all pole types. The maximum width of the magnet. For pole types 4 and 5. The maximum thickness of the magnet. For all pole types.
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Solution Setup.
2. 3.
Click the General tab. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options:
Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque
The speed remains constant in the motor. The output power remains constant in the motor. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.
Fan Load
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.
Related Topics:
The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power. Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Permanent-Magnet DC Motors
After you have selected Permanent-Magnet DC Motors as your model type, you need to define the following:
General data, such as the voltage, speed, and circuit type of the model. Stator data, such as the diameter, slot dimensions, and skew width of the stator. Stator pole data, such as its associated pole dimensions, type of steel, and pole magnet specifications. Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, slot data, and windings. Commutator and brush data, such as the commutator dimensions and brush length. Shaft data Solution data, such as rated output voltage and frequency.
U = Ub + R1 * I + E
where Ub is the voltage drop of one-pair brushes, R1 is the armature resistance, E = Ke * is the back emf with Ke the back-emf constant in Vs/rad, and is the speed in rad/s. For a given speed , armature current can be computed based on the applied voltage U, as shown below:
I = (U - Ub - Ke * )/R1
The shaft torque T2 is computed by:
T2 = Kt * I - Tfw where Kt is the torque constant in Nm/A, which is numerically the same as Ke, and Tfw is the frictional torque. The output power (mechanical power) is:
P2 = T2 *
The input power (electrical power) is:
27-76 RMxprt Machine Types
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
P1 = P2 + Pfw + Pcua + Pb + PFe where Pfw, Pcua, Pb, and PFe are frictional and wind loss, armature copper loss, brush drop loss,
and iron-core loss, respectively. The efficiency is:
10. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. 11. Choose File>Save to save the project. 12. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D project. Refer to the Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Problem application note, on the technical support page of the Ansoft web site, for a specific example of a permanent-magnet DC motor problem.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3.
opening a separate window.) Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. To use the Brush Press and Frictional Coefficient fields when you define the commutator and brush later in the Commutator/Brush Data window, enter 0 here for the Friction Loss.
Note
4. 5. 6.
Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. Click OK to close the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6.
The outer diameter of the stator core. The inner diameter of the stator core. The length of the stator core. The stacking factor of the stator core.
For a two-pole machine, a pole embrace of 0.75 yields a magnet with a span of 135 degrees (based on 0.75*180 degrees).
2.
Enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the maximum possible arc distance in the
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3. 4.
Enter the distance from the center of the stator to the magnet arc center in the Offset field. Enter 0 for a uniform air gap. To select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole: a. Click the Magnet Type button. The Select Definition window appears. b. Select or define a material for the magnet type. c. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. Enter the length of the magnet in the axial direction in the Magnet Length field. Enter the maximum radial thickness of the magnet at the center of the pole in the Magnet Thickness field. To control the flux, the magnets thickness may vary. Click OK to close the Properties window.
5. 6. 7.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4).. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic outline of the slot appears.
c. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field.
Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. b. c. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
9.
Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The stacking factor of the rotor core. The number of slots the rotor core contains. The type of slots in the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The skew width measured in slot number.
Bs2
Rs
Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Rotor Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2. When this check box is selected, only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). Rs A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4. Rs A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
4.
Enter the number of windings in the Multiplex Number field (1 for a single winding, 2 for double windings, 3 for triple windings). For a lap winding, the multiplex number is the number of commutators between the start and end of one winding, and the number of parallel branches is equal to the number of poles multiplied by the multiplex number. For a wave winding, the
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5.
Enter the number of virtual slots per each real slot in the Virtual Slots field. The rotor is assumed to have two layers of conductors, an upper and a lower layer. Each layer of conductors can have a number of windings, which are referred to as virtual slots. For example, the upper and lower layer can have two windings each, which would yield a virtual slot number of two; for a 12 slot machine, this would yield 24 commutation segments.
Note
6.
7.
8. 9.
Enter the total number of conductors in each rotor slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. This value is the total number of conductors in one real full rotor slot. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automat-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10. Select the Wire Size: a. b. c. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window.
11. Click the End/Insulation tab. 12. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 13. Do one of the following:
If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-85
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
14. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 15. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 16. Enter the distance between two rotor coils in the End Clearance field. 17. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field.
Slot Insulation
18. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 19. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field.
27-86 RMxprt Machine Types
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. 21. Select the type of equalizer connection from the Equalizer Connection pull-down menu. Select from None, Half, or Full. 22. Click OK to close the Properties window.
4. 5. 6.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
Click Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Winding tabWinding Type
The type of rotor winding. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Lap, Wave, and Frog Leg.
Multiplex Number Single, double, or triple windings (1, 2, or 3). Virtual Slots The number of virtual slots per real slot. Conductors per The number of conductors per rotor slot (0 for auto-design). Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units, wire type, diameter, and gauge. Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. When this check box is selected, the End Adjustment field appears instead. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. Base Inner Radius The inner radius of the base corner. Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Limited Fill FactorThe limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Equalizer The connection type of the equalizer. Select from None, Half, or Connection Full.
Note
4.
For Cylinder commutators, do the following: a. b. Enter the Commutator Diameter. Enter the Commutator Length. Enter the Outer Diameter. Enter the Inner Diameter.
5.
6.
Enter the thickness of the insulation between two consecutive commutator segments in the Commutator Insulation field.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-89
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7. 8. 9.
Click the Brush tab. Enter the Brush Width. Enter the Brush Length.
10. Enter the number of brush pairs when using a wave armature winding in the Brush Pairs field. 11. Enter the angle of displacement from the neutral axis, in mechanical degrees, in the Brush Displacement field.
Note
The brush displacement is positive for the counter-clockwise direction. For example, if the rotor turns clockwise and the brush displacement is also clockwise, then the angle is negative; if the rotor turns clockwise but the brush displacement is counter-clockwise, then the angle is positive.
12. Enter the voltage drop across one brush pair in the Brush Drop field. 13. Enter the mechanical pressure of the brushes as they press against the commutator in the Brush Press field. 14. Enter the Frictional Coefficient of the brush.
Note
If the Friction Loss field is used in the General window, the Brush Press and Frictional Coefficient fields will be hidden in the Commutator/Brush window. These fields are shown only when the Friction Loss field in the General window is set to zero.
For a Cylinder commutator type, the diameter of the commutator. For a Cylinder commutator type, the length of the commutator. For a Pancake commutator type, the outer diameter of the commutator. For a Pancake commutator type, the inner diameter of the commutator. The thickness of the insulation between the two commutator bars.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Brush tab
Brush Width Brush Length Brush Pairs Brush Displacement Brush Drop Brush Press Frictional Coefficient
The width of the brush. The length of the brush. The number of brush pairs. The displacement of the brush from the neutral position, in mechanical degrees (positive for anti-rotating direction). The voltage drop across a one-pair brush. The brush press per unit area. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine.) The frictional coefficient of the brush. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine.)
2. 3.
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.
The speed remains constant in the motor. The output power remains constant in the motor.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Fan Load
The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.
Related Topics:
The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power. Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
General data, such as the unit system, power, and voltage. Stator data, such as the slot types and dimensions, stator diameter, skew width, and laminations. Optional stator Vent data. Winding data, such as the parallel branches, conductors, and wire dimensions. Rotor pole data, such as its associated pole-body dimensions and air gaps. Optional Rotor damper data, such as the damper dimensions, rings, and material properties. Rotor winding data and the winding control parameters. Shaft Data
Solution data, such as specifying motor or generator application, and rated output voltage and frequency. Also see the Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
adopted to analyze the characteristics. The phasor diagram for a generator is shown on the left and and that for a motor is shown on the right.
M
jI d Xad
Id
Iq
O
Generator Motor In the figure, R1, X1, Xad, and Xaq are armature resistance, armature leakage reactance, d-axis armature reactance, and q-axis armature reactance, respectively. Xad is nonlinear, while a linearized value is used in the phasor diagram. Taking the input voltage U as the reference phasor, for a given current:
I = I
where is the power factor angle, a phasor represented by OM can be derived by: U + I(R1 + jX1 + jXaq) The direction of E0 can, therefore, be obtained. Taking the power angle, the angle that U legs E0, as , then the angle that I legs E0 is:
= +
The d- and q-axis currents are then represented by the following:
Id = I * sin( ) Iq = I * cos( )
The phasor length ON represents the d-axis back EMF from d-axis resultant flux linkage and is used to determine the d-axis field saturation. Then a frozen method is applied to derive E0, Xad, and exciting current If. The output power (electric power) is directly computed from voltage and current as:
27-94 RMxprt Machine Types
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
P2 = 3*U*I*cos( )
The input power (mechanical power) is defined as:
T1 = P1/
where SYMBOL is synchronous speed in rad/s. The efficiency is computed by:
Adapted to both Synchronous Motor and Generator The structures of the salient-pole synchronous motor and the generator are basically the same, but their phasor relationships and the computation methods are slightly different, their output characteristics data are also different. This is specified in the solution setup.
Auto Arrangement of Three-phase Windings Almost all commonly used three-phase single- and double-layer, half- and whole-type ac windings (including fractional-pitch windings) can be automatically arranged. Users do not need to define coils one by one. RMxprt also supports a double-layer winding with half-turn coils which are auto-arranged in the order of even, odd, even, odd, , and even, odd, as long as it is physically possible. When a designer adopts single-layer whole-coiled windings, RMxprt will perform winding arrangement optimization to minimize the average coil pitch. When asymmetric three-phase windings are used, winding arrangement is optimized in such a way that minimum negativesequence and zero-sequence components are achieved. Winding Editor Supporting Any Single- and Double-Layer Windings Besides taking advantage of the winding auto-arrangement function in RMxprt, users can also specify any special winding by using of the Winding Editor function. In Winding Editor, through modification of phase belonging, number of turns, in-slot and outslot number of each coil, it is possible to design single- and double-layer winding arrangement for any purposes. Analyze Air-Gap Magnetic Field Distribution For both uniform and non-uniform air gaps, Schwarz-Christopher Transformation is adopted to solve for the air-gap magnetic field distribution. Analyze EMF Waveform and Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Based on the analysis of the air-gap magnetic field waveform, taking into account coil short pitch, winding distribution, skew slot, winding connection, load effects and other factors, the emf waveforms in the coils and the windings are analyzed to solve for the emf distortion facRMxprt Machine Types 27-95
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
tors.
Analyze Dynamic Parameters of Damping Winding Different from the squirrel-cage winding of the induction machine, the damping winding of the salient-pole synchronous machine is located in the surface of magnetic field poles, which deviates greatly along the d- and the q-axes. Furthermore, the connection of damping bars has several forms. The bars under each pole could be connected, but not connected with those under other poles. All the bars could be connected together. The bars could be connected through end-plate. RMxprt can deal with all those complicated situations and give the dynamic parameters for the damping winding.
Double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot dimensions. 5. Optionally, you can add a vent to, or remove an existing vent from the stator. To add a vent, select the stator, and right-click to display the pop-up menu for Insert Vent. 6. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings, conductors, and insulation data. 7. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the general rotor geometry, the pole data, and the insulation data. 8. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductors and windings. 9. Optionally, you can add a damper to the design or remove an existing damper. To add a damper, use Machine-Insert Damper. This inserts the damper in the project tree under the rotor. You must then specify the slot type and other properties for the damper. 10. Optionally, you can add a vent to, or remove an existing vent from the rotor. To add a vent select the rotor, and right-click to display the pop-up menu. Use Insert Vent. 11. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. 12. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define this solution data. 13. Choose File>Save to save the project. 14. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Once the design is analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a Maxwell 3D design.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4. 5. 6.
Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field. Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. b. c. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
7. 8.
Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. Select the Slot Type: a. b. Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 6). Slot types 1 though 4 are filled with round wire. Slot types 5 and 6 are filled with rectangular wire. If Auto Design is enabled, the software designs an optimum slot geometry; in this case, you can input the tooth width dimension, and the software determines the slot width accordingly. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
Note
c.
9. Enter the number of sectors in the Lamination Sectors field. 10. Enter the thickness of the magnetic pressboard in the Pressboard Thickness field. Enter 0 for a non-magnetic pressboard. 11. Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field. 12. Click OK to close the Properties window.
The outer diameter of the stator core. The inner diameter of the stator core. The length of the stator core. The stacking factor of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The number of slots the stator core contains. The type of slots in the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The number of lamination sectors. The magnetic press board thickness (0 for a non-magnetic press board). The skew width measured in slot number.
2. 3. 4.
Bs2
Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field.
5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2. When this check box is selected, only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. When this check box is selected, the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed, and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth, on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Machine
Use the Stator Winding window to define the stator winding data, such as the coils, wires, insulation, number of parallel branches, and physical dimensions of the windings.
End Adjustment
Stator Coil
The stator winding data defines the configuration of one phase of the three-phase windings. To define the stator windings and insulation: 1. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Click the Winding tab. 3. 4. Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field. Select a Winding Type: a. b. Click the button for Winding Type. The Winding Type window appears. Select from one of the following three types of winding:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button, an outline of the selected winding appears. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. You need to set up the winding arrangement for each slot. For this winding type, the following letters are used for the phase windings:
Editor
Phase A/A return uses A/X. Phase B/B return uses B/Y.
Whole Coiled
Slot 123
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half Coiled
Slot 123
A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select 20, the Winding Editor Editor opens, where you can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot. A two-layer wave winding:
Whole Coiled
Slot 123
The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where m is the phase number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half Coiled
Slot 1 2 3
Only the top layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch. c. 5. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding, click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window.
Select a Winding Type. When you place the mouse cursor over a winding, an outline of the
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10 A user-defined single-layer winding arrangement. When you select it, enter the winding 11
phase A/A return uses A/X. phase B/B return uses B/Y.
arrangement, and choose OK. For this winding type, the following letters are used for the phase windings:
Slot 123
12
Slot 123
20 A user-defined winding arrangement. When you select this type, enter the winding
arrangement, and choose OK.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Slot 123
The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where m is the phase number.
22 A two-layer winding:
Slot 1 2 3
Note
Example 1: A one layer winding arranged in 12 slots should be defined as type 10, with the following arrangement: AAZZBBXXCCYY Example 2: A two layer winding arranged in 12 slots should be defined as type 20, with the following arrangement: AAZZBBXXCCYY
Only the top layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch. 6. 7. Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
8.
value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5.
9.
Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. 10. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
11. Select the Wire Size: a. b. c. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and
RMxprt Machine Types 27-107
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
return to the Properties window. 12. Click the End/Insulation tab. 13. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 14. Do one of the following:
If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
15. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 16. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 17. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field. 18. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field. 19. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 20. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. 21. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. 22. Click OK to close the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Winding tabWinding Layers The number of winding layers. Winding Type The type of stator winding. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled, Half Coiled, and Editor. Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the stator winding. Conductors per The number of conductors per stator slot (0 for auto-design). Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units, wire type, diameter, and gauge. End/ Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the Insulation Length7 tab Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. When this check box is selected, the End Adjustment field appears instead. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils, which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. Base Inner The inner radius of the base corner. Radius Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Factor
5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3.
4. 5. 6.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
Choose Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Note
The number of radial vent ducts. The width of the radial vent ducts. Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. O for non-magnetic spacer. Center-to-Center distance between two adjacent Vent ducts
RMxprt Machine Types 27-111
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. Click the Pole tab. Enter the pole-arc center offset from the rotor center in the Pole Arc Offset field.
Radius
Offset
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10. Enter the width of the pole shoe in the Pole Shoe Width field. 11. Enter the height of the pole shoe in the Pole Shoe Height field. 12. Enter the width of the pole body in the Pole Body Width field. 13. Enter the height of the pole body in the Pole Body Height field. 14. Enter the width between the rotor pole and rotor yoke in the Second Air Gap field. 15. To include the two arcs in the half-pole range, do the following: a. Select the Select Pole Arc check box. b. c. Enter the offset of the second arc perpendicular to the pole-center line in the Off2_x field. Enter the offset of the second arc parallel with the pole-center line in the Off2_y field.
16. Select or clear the Magnetic PressBoard check box to specify whether or not the press board is made of magnetic material. 17. Enter the thickness of the press board in the Press Board Thickness field. 18. Click the Insulation tab. 19. Enter the thickness of the insulating material beneath the shoe pole in the Shoe Insulation field. 20. Enter the thickness of the insulating material on the side of the pole body in the Pole Insulation field. 21. Enter the clearance distance between the windings in the Winding Clearance field. 22. Click OK to close the Properties window.
Pole tab
The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The stacking factor of the rotor core. The pole-arc center offset from the rotor center. The width of the pole shoe. The height of the pole shoe. The width of the pole body. The height of the pole body. The width of the second air gap, between the rotor pole and rotor yoke.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-113
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Insulation tab
Second Pole Arc Select or clear this option to specify whether or not the pole surface includes the two arcs in the half-pole range. When you select this check box, two additional fields appear: Off2_x and Off2_y. Off2_x The offset of the second arc perpendicular to the pole-center line. This field is only available when Second Pole Arc is selected. Off2_y The offset of the second arc parallel with the pole-center line. This field is only available when Second Pole Arc is selected. Magnetic Select or clear this option to specify whether or not the press board is made of magnetic material. PressBoard Press Board The thickness of the press board. Thickness Shoe Insulation The thickness of the insulating material beneath the pole shoe. Pole Insulation Winding Clearance
The thickness of the insulating material on the side of the pole body. The clearance distance between the windings.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Machine
Use the Rotor Winding window to define the wires and physical dimensions of the rotor winding. The rotor winding provides the excitation for the electromagnetic field that produces the rotor pole.
Center slot pitch Slot pitch Pole shoe width Pole insulation Wire width Pole body width Second air-gap
RMxprt Machine Types 27-115
Overall height
Shoe insulation
Wire thickness
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To define the rotor windings: 1. To open the Rotor Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Select the Winding Type for the rotor: a. b. Click the button. The Winding Type window appears. Click to select the type of winding, from Round, Cylinder, or EdgeWise. When you place the mouse cursor over the winding type, a schematic of the selected winding appears Click OK to return to the Properties window.
c. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Enter the number of parallel branches for the winding in the Parallel Branches field. Conductors per Pole Enter the number of wires in each conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter the width of the insulating wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Interturn Insulation Enter the gauge of the wire in the Wire Size field. Enter the Axial Clearance to specify the axial distance between the core and the coil at the end of the lamination stack.
Winding Fillet
Rotor length
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3. 4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To add a damper: 1. Right-click on the rotor icon in the project tree to display the short cut menu. 2. Click Insert Damper on the menu. The damper appears in the project tree under the rotor. The damper also includes an associated slot. 1. 2. To remove a damper, right-click on the rotor icon in the project tree to display the short cut menu. Click Remove Damper on the menu.
The damper and associated slot are removed from the project tree. The damper data contains the following fields.
Damper slots per Number of damper slots per pole. pole Slot type Cast Rotor. Bar conductor type. End length End ring width End ring height End ring conductor type. Slot pitch End Ring type
Damper slot type. Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field and selecting from the Select Slot Type window. Whether the rotor squirrel cage winding is cast. Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field, and using the Select Definition window to find and assign materials. Single side end extended bar length/ Axial width of end ring. Radial height of end ring. Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field and using the Select Definition window to find and assign the material. Slot pitch in mechanical degrees. Type of end ring for the damper. Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field and use the Select Pole type window to select from the available types.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3.
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.
For Generators. For Generators. For Motors. The speed remains constant in the motor. For Motors. The output power remains constant in the motor. For Motors. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. For Motors. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. For Motors. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.
Linear Torque
Fan Load
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the machine in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-119
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10. Enter a value in the Rated Power Factor field. 11. Select Wye or Delta from the Winding Connection pull-down list. 12. In the Exciter Efficiency field, enter the efficiency of the exciter used to supply the rotor winding with DC current if it is mechanically connected to the shaft of the generator. The efficiency value ranges between 0 and 1 and will only affect the total efficiency result. 13. To enter an Input Exciting Current, select the check box, enter a value, and select the units. 14. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.
Related Topics:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
General data, such as the voltage, speed, and circuit type of the model. Circuit data, such as lead trigger angle, transistor drop, and control circuit information. Stator data, such as the diameter, slot dimensions, winding data, and skew width of the stator. Rotor data Rotor pole data, such as the magnet dimensions and stacking factor. Shaft data Solution data, such as rated output voltage and frequency.
R1 + Ld p Lq e 0 id iq vq eq = Ld e R1 + Lq p 0 e0 0 0 R1 + L0 p i0 v0 vd ed
where R1, Ld, Lq, and L0 are armature resistance, d-axis synchronous inductance, q-axis synchronous inductance, and 0-axis inductance, respectively. e is rotor speed in electrical rad/s, and represents for d/dt. The transformations for terminal voltages, induced voltages, and winding currents are given by the following three equations:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
vd
T vq = C v b M v0
va
ed
T eq = C e b M e0
ea
ib = C iq M i0
ia
id
The transformation matrices for 2-phase, 3-phase, and 4-phases systems, noted as C2, C3, and C4, are as follows:
C2 =
C3 =
cos sin 1 ( 2) 2 -- cos ( ) sin ( ) 1 ( 2 ) 3 cos ( 2 ) sin ( 2 ) 1 ( 2 ) cos C 4 = sin cos sin sin cos sin cos 0 0 0 0
where = 2 /3. The input power (electric power) can now be computed from the voltage and current as:
T 1 p 1 = -- ( v d i d + v q i q + v 0 i 0 ) dt t 0
The output power (mechanical power) is:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
T2 = P2 /
where is the rotor speed in mechanical rad/s. The efficiency is computed by:
10. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. 11. Choose File>Save to save the project. 12. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design Please refer to the Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Problem application note, on the technical support page of the Ansoft web site, for a specific example of a brushless permanent-magnet DC motor problem.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
opening a separate window.) Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. Select DC or CCC from the Control Type pull-down list. Select a Circuit Type from the following types: Y3 Y-connected, three-phase. L3 Loop-type, three-phase. S3 Star-type, three-phase. C2 Cross-type, two-phase. L4 Loop-type, four-phase. S4 Star-type, four-phase. The circuit types are based on industry standards. By default, type Y3, a three-phase, six-status circuit, is selected as the circuit type.
Note
When you place the mouse cursor over a circuit type, an outline schematic of the circuit appears.
8.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Reference Speed The given speed of reference. Control Type The way the circuit is controlled. Select from DC or CCC (chopped current control). Circuit Type The drive circuit type. Click the button to open the Circuit Type window and select from the following six types:
Y3: Y-Type, 3-Phase L3: Loop-Type, 3-Phase S3: Star-Type, 3-Phase C2: Cross-Type, 2-Phase L4: Loop-Type, 4-Phase S4: Star-Type, 4-Phase
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
position. An angle of 0 means that the induced voltage in the triggered phase is at a maximum:
Note
A positive value represents a lead angle, and a negative value represents a lag angle.
3. 4. 5.
Enter the period from on-status to off-status of a transistor, in electrical degrees, in the Trigger Pulse Width field. Enter the voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on in the Transistor Drop field. Refer to the figures of the different circuit types in step 2. Enter the voltage drop of one diode in the discharge loop in the Diode Drop field. If you selected a star-type circuit (S3 or S4) as the Circuit Type, enter the total discharge voltage in this field. If you selected CCC (chopped current control) as the Control Type, then enter the maximum and minimum current values in the Maximum Current and Minimum Current fields. Click OK to close the Properties window.
6. 7.
The triggers lead angle, in electrical degrees. The period from on-status to off-status for a transistor, in electrical degrees. The voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The voltage drop across one diode in the discharge loop. The maximum current for the chopped current control. This field is not available for a DC circuit. The minimum current for the chopped current control. This field is not available for a DC circuit.
Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. Select the Slot Type: a. b. Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
Note
c. 9.
Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The outer diameter of the stator core. The inner diameter of the stator core. The length of the stator core. The stacking factor of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The number of slots the stator core contains. The type of slots in the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The skew width measured in slot number.
Bs2
Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field.
5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2. When this check box is selected, only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. When this check box is selected, the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed, and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth, on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
Motor
To define the stator windings, wires, and conductors: 1. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Click the Winding tab. 3. 4. Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field. Select a Winding Type: a. b. Click the button for Winding Type. The Winding Type window appears. Select from one of the following three types of winding:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button, an outline of the selected winding appears. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible (three for one-layer and three for two-layer): Type Description A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. You need to set up the winding arrangement for each slot. For this winding type, the following letters are used for the phase windings:
Editor
Phase A/A return uses A/X. Phase B/B return uses B/Y.
Whole Coiled
Slot 123
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half Coiled
Slot 123
A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select 20, the Winding Editor Editor opens, where you can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot. A two-layer wave winding:
Whole Coiled
Slot 123
The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where m is the phase number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Half Coiled
Slot 1 2 3
For a two layer winding, if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor, only the top layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil pitch. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding, click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 5.
Select a Winding Type. When you place the mouse cursor over a winding, an outline of the selected winding appears.
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10 A user-defined single-layer winding arrangement. When you select this type, enter the
winding arrangement, and choose OK. For this winding type, the following letters are used for the phase windings:
11
Phase A/A return uses A/X. Phase B/B return uses B/Y.
Slot 123
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Slot 123
20 A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select this type, enter the 21
winding arrangement, and choose OK. A two-layer wave winding:
Slot 123
The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where m is the phase number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
22 A two-layer winding:
Slot 1 2 3
6. 7.
Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field.
Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. 8. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5. 9. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. 10. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
11. Select the Wire Size: a. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-135
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
b. c.
Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window.
12. Click the End/Insulation tab. 13. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 14. Do one of the following:
If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the con-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
15. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 16. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 17. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field. 18. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field.
Slot Insulation
19. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 20. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. 21. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. 22. Click OK to close the Properties window.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-137
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5.
4. 5. 6.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
Click Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Factor
Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. Select a Pole Type:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
a. b.
Note
Click the button. The Select Pole Type window appears. Click a button to select the desired pole type (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5). TIP: When you run the mouse over each option, the diagram changes to show that pole type. When you place the mouse cursor over a pole type, an outline of the selected circuit type appears. Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 8.
The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The stacking factor of the rotor core. The pole type for the rotor. Click this button to open the Select Pole Type window and select from the following types: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
Some of the fields in the Rotor Pole window change, or are inactive, depending on the Rotor Type you select.
To define the rotor pole: 1. To open the Rotor Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. For all pole types except type 4, enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the max-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
imum possible arc distance in the Embrace field. This value is between 0 and 1.
For pole type 4, enter the shaft diameter of the rotor in the Shaft Diameter field. For pole types 1, 2, and 3, enter the distance from the center of the rotor to the polar arc center in the Offset field. Enter 0 for a uniform air gap.
Offset
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. For pole type 5, enter the thickness of the bridge across the two poles in the Bridge field. For pole type 5, enter the width of the rib supporting the bridge in the Rib field. Select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole from the Magnet Type pull-down menu. For pole types 4 and 5, enter the width of the magnet in the Magnet Width field. Enter the maximum radial thickness of the magnet in the Magnet Thickness field.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3.
Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options:
Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque
Fan Load
The speed remains constant in the motor. The output power remains constant in the motor. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.
Related Topics:
Analysis Offered
Adapted to both Synchronous Motor and Generator The structures of the salient-pole synchronous motor and the generator are basically the same, but their phasor relationships and the computation methods are slightly different, their output characteristics data are also different. Therefore, RMxprt divides the synchronous machine into two design modules: Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Generator. Auto Arrangement of Three-phase Windings Almost all commonly used three-phase single- and double-layer, half- and whole-type ac windings (including fractional-pitch windings) can be automatically arranged. Users do not need to define coils one by one. RMxprt also supports a double-layer winding with half-turn coils which are auto-arranged in the order of even, odd, even, odd, , and even, odd, as long as it is physically possible. When a designer adopts single-layer whole-coiled windings, RMxprt will perform winding arrangement optimization to minimize the average coil pitch. When asymmetric three-phase windings are used, winding arrangement is optimized in such a way that minimum negativesequence and zero-sequence components are achieved. Winding Editor Supporting Any Single- and Double-Layer Windings Besides taking the great advantage of the winding auto-arrangement function in RMxprt, users can also specify any special winding by using of the Winding Editor function.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
In Winding Editor, through modification of phase belonging, number of turns, in-slot and outslot number of each coil, it is possible to design single- and double-layer winding arrangement for any purposes.
Analyze Air-Gap Magnetic Field Distribution For both uniform and non-uniform air gaps, Schwarz-Christopher Transformation is adopted to solve for the air-gap magnetic field distribution. Analyze EMF Waveform and Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Based on the analysis of the air-gap magnetic field waveform, taking into account coil short pitch, winding distribution, skew slot, winding connection, load effects and other factors, the emf waveforms in the coils and the windings are analyzed to solve for the emf distortion factors.
Analyze Dynamic Parameters of Damping Winding Different from the squirrel-cage winding of the induction machine, the damping winding of the salient-pole synchronous machine is located in the surface of magnetic field poles, which deviates greatly along the d- and the q-axes. Furthermore, the connection of damping bars has several forms. The bars under each pole could be connected, but not connected with those under other poles. All the bars could be connected together. The bars could be connected through end-plate. RMxprt can deal with all those complicated situations and give the dynamic parameters for the damping winding.
Related Topics:
The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power. Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
General data, such as the power, voltage, and speed of the motor. Circuit data. Stator core data, such as the number of poles, diameter, and yoke thickness. Stator coil data, such as the slot liner thickness, number of parallel branches, and number of wires in each conductor. Rotor core data, such as the air gap dimensions and number of poles in the rotor. Shaft data. Solution data.
d ( , i ) u = u T + R S i + -------------------dt
where uT is the transistor or diode voltage drop, and Rs is the stator winding resistance. ( , i) is the flux linkage of the winding at rotor position and winding current i, as is shown in Figure 8,
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
where the rotor position when the center of the rotor slot is aligned to the winding axis is defined as 0.
Figure 8
Let
( , i ) L = ------------------i
and
L ( i ) G = ----------------- = -------
Then
u = u T + R S i + L pi + G e i
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
where e is the rotor speed in electrical rad/s, and p is the differential operator as given by:
p =
The instant electromagnetic torque t2 is:
d dt
1 2 t 2 = -- Gi 2
The input electric power is computed from voltage and current as:
T 1 P 1 = -- ( u i dt ) T 0
The output mechanical power is:
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P Cua + P t + P Fe )
where Pfw, PCua, Pt, and PFe are frictional and wind loss, armature copper loss, transistor/diode loss, and iron-core loss, respectively. The average output mechanical shaft torque T2 is:
P2 T 2 = -----
where is the rotor angular speed in mechanical rad/s. The efficiency of the electric machine is computed by:
P2 = ------ 100 P1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6. 7. 8. 9.
ings and conductors. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. Choose File>Save to save the project.
When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D project. Please refer to the Switched Reluctance Motor Problem application note, on the technical support page of the Ansoft web site, for a specific example.
The circuit types are based on industry standards. By default, type Full-Voltage, is selected as the circuit type.
Note
When you place the mouse cursor over a circuit type, an outline schematic of the circuit appears.
7.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
maximum:
Note
A positive value represents a lead angle, and a negative value represents a lag angle.
3.
Enter the period from on-status to off-status of a transistor, in electrical degrees, in the Trigger Pulse Width field. The trigger pulse width is the width of the energizing pulse applied to the winding, or the period for an on status of the transistors. The maximum on period is given by 180 degrees plus the value for the lead angle of trigger. Enter the voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on in the Transistor Drop field. Refer to the figures of the different circuit types in step 2. This value is over one conduction path when the transistors are triggered. Enter the voltage drop on all anti-parallel diodes in the discharge path in the Diode Drop field. If you selected a star-type circuit (S3 or S4) as the Circuit Type, enter the total discharge voltage in this field. If you selected CCC (chopped current control) as the Control Type, then enter the maximum and minimum current values in the Maximum Current and Minimum Current fields. Click OK to close the Properties window.
4.
5.
6. 7.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The triggers lead angle, in electrical degrees. The period from on-status to off-status for a transistor, in electrical degrees. The voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on. The voltage drop across one diode in the discharge loop. The maximum current for the chopped current control. This field is not available for a DC circuit. The minimum current for the chopped current control. This field is not available for a DC circuit.
6.
Enter the number of poles the stator core contains in the Number of Poles field. Enter the pole embrace in the Embrace field. The pole embrace is the ratio of the actual pole arc angle to the maximum possible pole angle in the field. This value ranges from between 0 and 1. Enter the thickness of the stator coil yoke in the Yoke Thickness field.
9.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
stator.
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
4. 5. 6. 7. Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. Enter the number of turns per stator pole in the Turns per Pole field. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
8.
Select the Wire Size: a. b. c. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
options: You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. 9. Enter the conductor area ratio of the coupled circuit to the main circuit in the Coupled Ratio field. 10. Click OK to close the Properties window.
4.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5. 6.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
2. 3. 4. 5.
without opening a separate window.) Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. b. c. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
6.
7. 8. 9.
Enter the effective magnetic length of the core in the Stacking Factor field. This value ranges from 0 to 1, and is defined as the total length minus the total lamination insulation, divided by the total length. Enter the number of poles the rotor core contains in the Number of Poles field. Enter the ratio of the actual pole angle in relation to the maximum possible pole angle in the Embrace field. The value ranges from 0 to 1. Enter the thickness of the rotor yoke in the Yoke Thickness field.
2.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3.
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.
Fan Load
The speed remains constant in the motor. The output power remains constant in the motor. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.
Related Topics:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power. Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
General data, such as the frequency, winding connection, number of poles, and voltage. Stator data, such as the slot type and dimensions, stator diameter, and winding data. Rotor pole data, such as its associated dimensions, stacking factor, and magnet type. Shaft data. Solution data. add a vent to or remove an existing vent from a stator, add a damper to or remove a damper from a rotor.
Figure 6
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
In Figure 6, R1, Xd, and Xq are armature resistance, d-axis synchronous reactance, and q-axis synchronous reactance, respectively. Xd is the sum of leakage reactance, X1 and d-axis armature reactance Xad, and Xq is the sum of X1 and q-axis armature reactance Xaq:
X d = X 1 + X ad X q = X 1 + X aq
For a given torque angle , the angle that E0 lags U, we have the following:
I d X d + I q R 1 = U cos E 0 I d R 1 + I q X q = U sin
Solving for Id and Iq yields:
Id = tanh ---Iq
The power factor angle (or torque angle) that I legs U, is:
= +
27-162 RMxprt Machine Types
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The input power (electric power) can now be computed from voltage and current as:
P 1 = 3UI cos
The output power (mechanical power) is:
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P Cu + P Fe )
where Pfw, PCu, and PFe are frictional and wind loss, armature copper loss, and iron-core loss, respectively. The output mechanical power (torque) T2 is:
P2 T 2 = -----
where is the synchronous speed in rad/s. The efficiency is computed by:
P2 = ------ 100 % P1
The motor is started the same way as for an induction motor, by using a squirrel-cage-type winding -- called a damper winding in this case -- that is mounted on the rotor, producing the starting torque.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
data. 10. Choose File>Save to save the project. 11. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Use the Stator Data, Stator Slot Data, and Stator Winding Data windows to define the stator data, such as physical dimensions of the lamination, windings, and conductors. To define the general stator data: 1. To open the Stator Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field. Enter the effective magnetic length of the core in the Stacking Factor field. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. b. c. 7. 8. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears.
Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window. Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables.
Note
c. 9.
Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window. Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field.
The outer diameter of the stator core. The inner diameter of the stator core. The length of the stator core. The stacking factor of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The number of slots the stator core contains. The type of slots in the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The skew width measured in slot number.
2. 3. 4.
Bs2
Rs
Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2. When this check box is selected, only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. When this check box is selected, the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed, and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth, on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
Synchronous Motor
To define the stator windings and conductors: 1. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Click the Winding tab. 3. 4. Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field. Select the Winding Type for the stator: a. b. Click the button for Winding Type. The Winding Type window appears. Select from one of the following three types of winding:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Note
Editor
When you place the mouse cursor over the winding type, a schematic of that type appears. Click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 5. 6. 7.
Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches field. Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
8. 9.
10. Select the Wire Size: a. b. c. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
options: You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. 11. Click the End/Insulation tab. 12. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 13. Do one of the following:
If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
Stator Pole
14. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 15. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 16. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field.
Slot Insulation
18. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 19. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. 20. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. 21. Click OK to close the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To define different size wires: 1. In the Wire Size window, select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu. 2. 3. Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type. Enter the appropriate wire data in the table:
4. 5. 6.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
Click Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units, wire type, diameter, and gauge. Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. When this check box is selected, the End Adjustment field appears instead. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils, which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. Base Inner The inner radius of the base corner. Radius Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Factor
Wire Wrap
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Number of radial vent ducts Width of radial vent ducts Width of magnetic spacer which hold vent ducts. 0 for non-magnetic spacer. Vent ducts.
Enter the effective magnetic length of the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. This value ranges from 0 to 1 and is defined as the total length minus the total lamination insulation, divided by the total length. A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated. Select a Pole Type: a. b. Click the button. The Select Pole Type window appears. Click a button to select the desired pole type (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8). TIP: When you run
RMxprt Machine Types 27-173
7.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
the mouse over each option, the diagram changes to show that pole type.
Note
When you place the mouse cursor over a pole type, an outline of the selected circuit type appears. Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 8.
The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The stacking factor of the rotor core. The pole type for the rotor. Click this button to open the Select Pole Type window and select from the following types: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. When you mouse over each button, a diagram appears for that pole type, showing the arrangement and dimensions.
Some of the fields in the Rotor Pole window change, or are inactive, depending on the Rotor Type you select.
To define the rotor pole: 1. To open the Rotor Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Enter the limited diameter for the magnet ducts in the D1 field. 3. 4. 5. Enter one or more of the following magnet duct dimensions, depending on the pole type selected: O1, O2, B1. For all pole types except number 8, enter the width of the rib supporting the bridge in the Rib field. Select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole: a. Click Magnet Type button.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
b. c. 6. 7. 8.
The Select Definition window appears. Select a material. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
Enter the total width of all magnets per pole in the Magnet Width field. Enter the maximum radial thickness of the magnet in the Magnet Thickness field. Click OK to close the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Damper slot type. Click the field button open the Slot selection window and select one of the four types. Specify whether the rotor squirrel cage winding is cast. Click the field button to open the Materials Selection window to specify the material for the bar conductor. Single side end extended bar length Axial width of end ring. Click the field button to open the Materials Selection window to specify the material for the end ring conductor.
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3.
Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options:
Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque
Fan Load
The speed remains constant in the motor. The output power remains constant in the motor. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click the Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor tab. Select Wye or Delta from the Winding Connection pull-down list.
General tab. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type. General tab. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power. General tab. Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units. General tab. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units. General tab. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units. General tab. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units. Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor tab. Select Wye or Delta from the Winding Connection pull-down list.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Universal Motors
After you have selected Universal Motors as your model type, enter the motor data to define the following:
General data, such as the number of poles, frictional loss, and reference speed. Stator pole and winding data, such as its associated pole dimensions, type of steel, and wire definitions. Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, rotor diameter, laminations, and windings and conductors. Commutator and brush data, such as the commutator dimensions and brush length. Shaft data. Solution data.
U = ZI = ( R a + R f + R b )I + j ( L a + L f + 2M af )I + e ( G aa + G af )I
where, Ra, Rf, and Rb are the armature resistance, field winding resistance, and the brush contact resistance, respectively. La, Lf, and Maf are the armature self inductance, field winding self inductance, and their mutual inductance, respectively, and are linearized nonlinear parameters. Gaa and Gaf are the coefficients of motion induced voltages by the armature and field winding currents, respectively, and are also linearized nonlinear parameters. is the radian frequency, and e the
RMxprt Machine Types 27-179
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
rotor speed in electric rad/s. Z is equivalent input impedance. When the brush axis is aligned with q-axis:
M af = G aa = 0
For a given rotor speed e, armature current can be computed based on the applied voltage U, as:
U I = --Z
The input power (electric power) is directly computed from voltage and current as:
P 1 = UI cos
The output power (mechanical power) is:
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P b + P + P Fe ) cuf
where Pfw, Pb, Pcua, Pcuf, and PFe are frictional and wind loss, brush drop loss, armature copper loss, field winding copper loss, and iron-core loss, respectively. The output mechanical shaft torque T2 is:
P2 T 2 = -----
The efficiency is computed by:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings and conductors. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree to define the rotor slot dimensions. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor windings and conductors. Double-click the Machine-Commutator entry in the project tree to define the commutator and brush data.
10. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. 11. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. 12. Choose File>Save to save the project. 13. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design. Refer to the Universal Motor Problem application note, on the technical support page of the Ansoft web site, for a specific example.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following fields: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Switched Reluctance Motor). Number of Poles Number of poles for this machine. Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. Wind Loss The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. Reference Speed The given speed of reference.
Machine Type
The outer diameter of the stator core. The overall width of the stator outer profile. The inner diameter of the stator core.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The length of the stator core. The effective magnetic length of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window.
For a two-pole machine, a pole embrace of 0.75 yields a magnet with a span of 135 degrees (based on 0.75*180 degrees).
2. 3.
Enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the maximum possible arc distance in the Embrace field. This value is between 0 and 1. Enter the distance from the center of the stator to the magnet arc center in the Offset field.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Offset
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Enter the minimum pole width in the PoleWidth field. Enter the yoke thickness in the Ty field. Enter the shoe-tip thickness in the Ts field. Enter the poles hole radius in the R1 field. If there is no hole in the design, enter 0. Enter the poles side fillet radius in the R2 field. Enter the radius of the poles center side fillet arcs in the R3 field.
10. Enter the radius of the shoe connecting arc in the R4 field. To auto-design this dimension, enter 0. For a linear connection, enter 0.
27-184 RMxprt Machine Types
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
11. Enter the inner radius of the screw hole between the two poles in the R5 field. If there is no hole in the design, enter 0. 12. Enter the outer radius of the screw hole between the two poles in the R6 field. If there is no hole in the design, enter 0. 13. Click OK to close the Properties window.
The pole embrace. The pole-arc center offset from the stator center (0 for a uniform air gap). The minimum pole width. The yoke thickness. The shoe-tip thickness. The hole radius in the pole (0 for no hole). The radius of the pole side fillet. The radius of the center of the pole side fillet arcs. The radius of the shoe connecting arc (0 for auto-design or for a linear connection). The inner radius of the screw hole between two poles (0 for no hole). The outer radius of the screw hole between two poles (0 for no hole).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
stator.
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
4. 5. 6. 7.
Stator Pole
Enter the number of parallel branches in the stator winding in the Parallel Branches field. Enter the number of turns per stator pole in the Turns per Pole field. To auto-design the number of turns, enter 0. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
8.
Select the Wire Size: a. b. c. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
options: You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field.
9.
10. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. 11. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. 12. Click OK to close the Properties window.
4. 5.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
Click Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-187
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
6.
When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Note
2.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3. 4.
minus the total insulation from the laminations, divided by the total length. A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated. Enter the number of slots in the rotor core in the Number of Slots field. Select a Slot Type: a. b. Click the button. The Select Slot Type window appears. Click a button to select the desired pole type (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6). Though slots 3 and 4 are visually similar, they differ in how the edges are constructed. Slot 3 has a tapered edge leading from the slot opening to the main slot body. Slot 4 has a rounded edge at the same location, where the quantity Hr1 defines the radius of the corner slot. TIP: When you run the mouse over each option, the diagram changes to show that pole type. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
c. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Enter the outer diameter of the rotor core in the Outer Diameter field. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor core in the Inner Diameter field. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. b. c. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
9.
Enter the number of slots in the skew width in the Skew Width field.
The effective magnetic length of the rotor core. The number of slots in the rotor core. The rotor core slot type. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window and select from the following types: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The skew width measured in slot number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Bs2
Rs
Always available. Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Always available. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
4.
Enter the number of windings in the Multiplex Number field (1 for a single winding, 2 for double windings, 3 for triple windings). For a lap winding, the multiplex number is the number of commutators between the start and end of one winding, and the number of parallel branches is equal to the number of poles multiplied by the multiplex number. For a wave winding, the
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5.
Enter the number of virtual slots per each real slot in the Virtual Slots field. The rotor is assumed to have two layers of conductors, an upper and a lower layer. Each layer of conductors can have a number of windings, which are referred to as virtual slots. For example, the upper and lower layer can have two windings each, which would yield a virtual slot number of two; for a 12 slot machine, this would yield 24 commutation segments.
Note
6.
7.
8. 9.
Enter the total number of conductors in each rotor slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. This value is the total number of conductors in one real full rotor slot. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automat-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10. Select the Wire Size: a. b. c. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window.
11. Click the End/Insulation tab. 12. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 13. Do one of the following:
If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-193
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
14. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 15. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 16. Enter the distance between two rotor coils in the End Clearance field. 17. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field.
Slot Insulation
18. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 19. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field.
27-194 RMxprt Machine Types
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. 21. Select the type of equalizer connection from the Equalizer Connection pull-down menu. Select from None, Half, or Full. 22. Click OK to close the Properties window.
4. 5. 6.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
Click Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Winding tabWinding Type
The type of rotor winding. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Lap, Wave, and Frog Leg.
Multiplex Number Single, double, or triple windings (1, 2, or 3). Virtual Slots The number of virtual slots per real slot. Conductors per The number of conductors per rotor slot (0 for auto-design). Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units, wire type, diameter, and gauge. Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. When this check box is selected, the End Adjustment field appears instead. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the rotor coils. Base Inner Radius The inner radius of the base corner. Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Limited Fill FactorThe limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Equalizer The connection type of the equalizer. Select from None, Half, or Connection Full.
Note
4.
For Cylinder commutators, do the following: a. b. Enter the Commutator Diameter. Enter the Commutator Length. Enter the Outer Diameter. Enter the Inner Diameter.
5.
6.
Enter the thickness of the insulation between two consecutive commutator segments in the Commutator Insulation field.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-197
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
7. 8. 9.
Click the Brush tab. Enter the Brush Width. Enter the Brush Length.
10. Enter the number of brush pairs when using a wave armature winding in the Brush Pairs field. 11. Enter the angle of displacement from the neutral axis, in mechanical degrees, in the Brush Displacement field.
Note
The brush displacement is positive for the counter-clockwise direction. For example, if the rotor turns clockwise and the brush displacement is also clockwise, then the angle is negative; if the rotor turns clockwise but the brush displacement is counter-clockwise, then the angle is positive.
12. Enter the voltage drop across one brush pair in the Brush Drop field. 13. Enter the mechanical pressure of the brushes as they press against the commutator in the Brush Press field. 14. Enter the Frictional Coefficient of the brush.
Note
If the Friction Loss field is used in the General window, the Brush Press and Frictional Coefficient fields will be hidden in the Commutator/Brush window. These fields are shown only when the Friction Loss field in the General window is set to zero.
For a Cylinder commutator type, the diameter of the commutator. For a Cylinder commutator type, the length of the commutator. For a Pancake commutator type, the outer diameter of the commutator. For a Pancake commutator type, the inner diameter of the commutator. The thickness of the insulation between the two commutator bars.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Brush tab
Brush Width Brush Length Brush Pairs Brush Displacement Brush Drop Brush Press Frictional Coefficient
The width of the brush. The length of the brush. The number of brush pairs. The displacement of the brush from the neutral position, in mechanical degrees (positive for anti-rotating direction). The voltage drop across a one-pair brush. The brush press per unit area. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine.) The frictional coefficient of the brush. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine.)
2. 3.
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.
The speed remains constant in the motor. The output power remains constant in the motor.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Fan Load
The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click the Universal Motor tab. Enter the Frequency, and select the units.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
General DC Machines
After you have selected DC Machine as your model type, enter the motor data to define the following:
General data, such as the output power, rated voltage, speed, and machine type (motor or generator). Stator data, such as its associated pole dimensions, type of steel, and pole magnet specifications. Stator field data, such as shoe and pole insulation, dimensions, and winding information. Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, rotor diameter, lamination, and wire specifications. Commutator and brush data, such as the commutator type and dimensions and brush length. Shaft data.
Solution data. By option you can insert or remove the following to a DC machine. Compensating data, added under the stator Commutating data, added under the stator Vent data, added under the rotor Shunt data, added under the stator field. Series data, added under the stator field.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
improve commutating, commutating poles and winding can be equipped between two adjacent main poles and compensating winding can be equipped under main poles. The performance of a DC machine is computed by DC analysis.
U = E + ( Ub + R1 Ia )
where, Ub is the voltage drop of one-pair brushes, R1 is the total series resistance of the armature branch, E is the back emf as given below:
E = C Ef I f + C Es I a
where CEf and CEs, which depend on the saturation of the magnetic field, are the back-emf coefficients in ohm.s/rad, is the rotor speed in mechanical rad/s, and If and Ia are the exciting currents of the shunt and series windings, respectively. For a given speed, armature current can be computed based on the terminal voltage U, as shown below:
U U b C Ef I f I a = -------------------------------------------------R 1 + C Es
The shaft torque is computed from:
T 2 = ( C Tf I f + C Ts I a ) I a T fw
where CTf and CTs are the torque coefficients in Nm/A^2 which are numerically the same as CEf and CEs, respectively. Tfw is the frictional and wind torque. The output power (mechanical power) is
P2 = T2
The input power (electrical power) is
P 1 = P 2 + ( P fw + P Cua + P b + P Fe )
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
where Pfw, PCua, Pb, and PFe are the frictional and wind loss, armature branch copper loss, brush drop loss, iron-core loss and shunt winding copper loss, respectively. The efficiency is:
P2 = ------ 100 % P1
U = E ( Ub + R1 Ia ) E = C Ef I f + C Es I a
The performance is analyzed as follows
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductors and windings. 9. Double-click the Machine-Commutator entry in the project tree to define the commutator and brush data. 10. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft. 11. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. 12. Choose File>Save to save the project. 13. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design. Refer to the DC Machine application note, on the technical support page of the Ansoft web site, for a specific example of a problem using a DC machine. (IS THERE ONE?)
2.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3. 4. 5. 6.
Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field. Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field. Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field. Click OK to close the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
b. c. 8. 9.
Click a button to specify the desired field type (either 1 or 2). Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window and return to the Properties window.
Enter the length of the stator main pole in the Pole Length field. Enter the effective magnetic length for the stator main pole in the Pole Stacking Factor field. a. b. c. Click the button for Pole Material. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
11. Enter the thickness of the pole press boards in the Press Board Thickness field. 12. If the pole press board is made of magnetic material, then select the Magnetic Press Board check box. 13. Click OK to close the Properties window.
The maximum diameter for a polygon-type frame. The minimum outer width for a polygon-type frame. The thickness of the frame. The length of the frame. The steel type of the frame. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The pole type of the stator. Click the button to open the Select Pole Type window and select from the following two types: 1 and 2. The length of the stator main pole. The stacking factor of the stator main pole. The steel type of the stator main pole. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The thickness of the pole press boards. Whether or not the pole press board is made of magnetic material.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Note
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Enter the inner diameter at the pole center in the Dmin field. Enter the diameter at the pole tip in the Dmax field. Enter the width of the pole arc with a uniform air gap in the Bp0 field. For an eccentric air gap, enter 0. Enter the width of the pole tip in the Bp1 field. Enter the maximum width of the pole shoe in the Bp2 field. This field is only available for a Pole Type of 1. Enter the minimum width of the pole shoe in the Bp3 field. This field is only available for a Pole Type of 1. Enter the size of the pole shoe fillet in the Rp0 field. THis field is only available for a Pole Type of 2. Enter the fillet between the pole shoe and the pole body in the Rp1 field. THis field is only available for a Pole Type of 2.
10. Enter the pole shoe height in the Hp field. 11. Enter the pole body width in the Bm field. 12. Click OK to close the Properties window.
The inner diameter at the pole center. The diameter at the pole tip. The width of the pole arc with a uniform air gap (0 for an eccentric air gap). The width of the pole tip. The maximum width of the pole shoe. For pole type 1. The minimum width of the pole shoe. FOr pole type 1. The pole shoe fillet. For pole type 2.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Rp1 Hp Bm
The fillet between the pole shoe and the pole body. For pole type 2. The height of the pole shoe. The width of the pole body.
2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
The thickness of the insulation under the pole shoe. The thickness of the insulation at the pole body side. The minimum air gap between two field windings, or the minimum gap between a field winding and a commutating winding. The thickness of the insulation between the shunt winding and the series winding. The cumulative exciting or differential exciting of the series winding to the shunt winding. Select Cumulative or Differential from the pull-down list.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Shunt icon appears under the field icon. To Remove an existing shunt: 1. 2. Right click on the Field icon under the stator in the project tree to display the popup menu. Click Remove Shunt. The shut is removed from the project tree. The Shunt data for a General DC Machine contains the following fields.
Winding type
Specified as Round, Cylinder coil, or Edgewise coil, by clicking the button to display the Winding Type selection window. Number of conductors per pole. 0 for auto-design. Odd number of strands for the case where the input and output leads are on different sides. Number of strands (number of wires per conductor). 0 for auto-design. Double side wire wrap thickness. 0 for auto-pickup in the wire library. Click the button to display the Wire Size selection window. Axial gap between field winding and pole body on the inner coil. Limited cross section width for winding design or arrangement. 0 for available maximum area. Limited cross section height for winding design or arrangement. 0 for available maximum area.
Parallel branches Number of parallel branches. Conductors per pole Number of strands Wire wrap Wire size. Axial Clearance Limited cross width Limited cross height Winding fillet.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Series data for a General DC Machine contains the following fields.
Winding type
Specified as Round, Cylinder coil, or Edgewise coil, by clicking the button to display the Winding Type selection window. Number of conductors per pole. 0 for auto-design. Odd number of strands for the case where the input and output leads are on different sides. Number of strands (number of wires per conductor). 0 for auto-design. Double side wire wrap thickness. 0 for auto-pickup in the wire library. Click the button to display the Wire Size selection window. Axial gap between field winding and pole body on the inner coil. Limited cross section width for winding design or arrangement. 0 for available maximum area. Limited cross section height for winding design or arrangement. 0 for available maximum area.
Parallel branches Number of parallel branches. Conductors per pole Number of strands Wire wrap Wire size. Axial Clearance Limited cross width Limited cross height Winding fillet.
To access the data for compensating inserted to a General DC Machine, double click on the Machine-Rotor-Compensating item in the project tree. The Compensating properties window contains the following fields.
Slots per pole Bc0 Hc0 Bc2 Hc2
Number of slots per pole for the compensating winding. Opening width of the compensating slots. Opening height of the compensating slots. Width of the compensating slots. Height of the compensating slots.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Conductors per slot Number of strands Wire wrap Rectangle wire Wire size Slot liner End adjustment
Number of conductors per slot for the compensating windings Number of strands (number of wires per conductor), 0 for auto-design. Double-side wire wrap thickness, 0 for auto pickup in the wire library Whether to use round (the default) or rectangle wire. Click the button to display the Wire Size window to specify the wire diameter and gauge. Insulation slot liner thickness one side end length adjustment of a conductor.
Width of the commutating poles Height of the commutating poles. Length of the commutating poles Shoe width of the commutating poles Shoe height of the commutating poles. Length of the second air gap between the commutating pole and the frame. Stacking factor for the commutating poles. Steel type of the commutating poles. Click the button to display the Select Definition window. Thickness of insulation on the pole body side.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Specified as Round, Cylinder coil, or Edgewise coil, by clicking the button to display the Winding Type selection window. Number of conductors per pole. 0 for auto-design. Odd number of strands for the case where the input and output leads are on different sides. Number of strands (number of wires per conductor). 0 for auto-design. Double side wire wrap thickness. 0 for auto-pickup in the wire library. Click the button to display the Wire Size selection window. Axial gap between field winding and pole body on the inner coil. Limited cross section width for winding design or arrangement. 0 for available maximum area. Limited cross section height for winding design or arrangement. 0 for available maximum area.
Parallel branches Number of parallel branches. Conductors per pole Number of strands Wire wrap Wire size. Axial Clearance Limited cross width Limited cross height Winding fillet.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
b.
c. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
The Select Slot Type window appears. Click a button to select the desired slot type (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6). Though slots 3 and 4 are visually similar, they differ in how the edges are constructed. Slot 3 has a tapered edge leading from the slot opening to the main slot body. Slot 4 has a rounded edge at the same location, where the quantity Hr1 defines the radius of the corner slot. TIP: When you run the mouse over each option, the diagram changes to show that pole type. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
Enter the number of lamination sectors in the Lamination Sectors field. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor core in the Outer Diameter field. Enter the inner diameter of the rotor core in the Inner Diameter field. Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field. Select a Steel Type for the rotor core: a. b. c. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
10. Enter the thickness of the pole press boards in the Press Board Thickness field. 11. Enter the number of slots in the skew width in the Skew Width field. 12. Click OK to close the Properties window.
The effective magnetic length of the rotor core. The number of slots the rotor core contains. The type of slots in the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The number of lamination sectors. The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The thickness of the pole press boards. The skew width measured in slot number.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Bs2
Rs
Always available. Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Always available.
4.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected). A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
4.
Enter the number of windings in the Multiplex Number field (1 for a single winding, 2 for double windings, 3 for triple windings). For a lap winding, the multiplex number is the number of commutators between the start and end of one winding, and the number of parallel branches is equal to the number of poles multiplied by the multiplex number. For a wave winding, the
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5.
Enter the number of virtual slots per each real slot in the Virtual Slots field. The rotor is assumed to have two layers of conductors, an upper and a lower layer. Each layer of conductors can have a number of windings, which are referred to as virtual slots. For example, the upper and lower layer can have two windings each, which would yield a virtual slot number of two; for a 12 slot machine, this would yield 24 commutation segments.
Note
6.
7.
8. 9.
Enter the total number of conductors in each rotor slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. This value is the total number of conductors in one real full rotor slot. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automat-
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
10. Select the Wire Size: a. b. c. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm. The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window.
11. Click the End/Insulation tab. 12. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 13. Do one of the following:
If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-217
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
14. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 15. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 16. Enter the distance between two rotor coils in the End Clearance field. 17. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field.
Slot Insulation
18. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 19. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field.
27-218 RMxprt Machine Types
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
20. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. 21. Select the type of equalizer connection from the Equalizer Connection pull-down menu. Select from None, Half, or Full. 22. Click OK to close the Properties window.
4. 5. 6.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
Click Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Winding tabWinding Type
The type of rotor winding. Click the button to open the Winding Type window and choose from Lap, Wave, and Frog Leg.
Multiplex Number Single, double, or triple windings (1, 2, or 3). Virtual Slots The number of virtual slots per real slot. Conductors per The number of conductors per rotor slot (0 for auto-design). Slot Coil Pitch The coil pitch measured in number of slots. Number of The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). Strands Wire Wrap The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units, wire type, diameter, and gauge. Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. When this check box is selected, the End Adjustment field appears instead. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the rotor coils. Base Inner Radius The inner radius of the base corner. Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation. Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Limited Fill FactorThe limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Equalizer The connection type of the equalizer. Select from None, Half, or Connection Full.
Magnetic Spacer Width of magnetic spacer which hold vent ducts. 0 for non-magnetic spacer. Width Duct Pitch Holes per Row Inner Hole Diameter Outer Hole Diameter
Vent ducts Number of axial vent holes per row Diameter of vent holes in inner row. Diameter of vent holes in outer row.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Center-to-center diameter of inner row hole vents. Center-to-center diameter of outer row hole vents. Number of axial banding slots to tight the rotor winding.
Width of Banding Width of axial banding slots Slots Depth of Banding Depth of axial banding slots Slots
Note
4.
For Cylinder commutators, do the following: a. b. Enter the Commutator Diameter. Enter the Commutator Length. Enter the Outer Diameter. Enter the Inner Diameter.
5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Enter the thickness of the insulation between two consecutive commutator segments in the Commutator Insulation field. Click the Brush tab. Enter the Brush Width. Enter the Brush Length.
10. Enter the number of brush pairs when using a wave armature winding in the Brush Pairs field. 11. Enter the angle of displacement from the neutral axis, in mechanical degrees, in the Brush Dis27-222 RMxprt Machine Types
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The brush displacement is positive for the counter-clockwise direction. For example, if the rotor turns clockwise and the brush displacement is also clockwise, then the angle is negative; if the rotor turns clockwise but the brush displacement is counter-clockwise, then the angle is positive.
12. Enter the voltage drop across one brush pair in the Brush Drop field. 13. Enter the mechanical pressure of the brushes as they press against the commutator in the Brush Press field. 14. Enter the Frictional Coefficient of the brush.
Note
If the Friction Loss field is used in the General window, the Brush Press and Frictional Coefficient fields will be hidden in the Commutator/Brush window. These fields are shown only when the Friction Loss field in the General window is set to zero.
For a Cylinder commutator type, the diameter of the commutator. For a Cylinder commutator type, the length of the commutator. For a Pancake commutator type, the outer diameter of the commutator. For a Pancake commutator type, the inner diameter of the commutator. The thickness of the insulation between the two commutator bars. The width of the brush. The length of the brush. The number of brush pairs. The displacement of the brush from the neutral position, in mechanical degrees (positive for anti-rotating direction).
Brush tab
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The voltage drop across a one-pair brush. The brush press per unit area. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine.) The frictional coefficient of the brush. (Available only when Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine.)
2. 3. 4.
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material. When it is selected, the shaft is magnetic. Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft has a ventilation fan. When it is selected, no fan is being used. When it is cleared, the design uses a fan, and two additional fields appear: Fan Diameter and Blade Width. The outer diameter of the ventilation fan. The width of the ventilation fans blades.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3.
type. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options:
Const Speed Const Power Const Torque Linear Torque
Fan Load
The speed remains constant in the motor. The output power remains constant in the motor. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/ nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Enter the output power in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the applied or output rated DC voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the given rated speed in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click the DC Machine tab. Select one of the following from the Field Exciting Type pull-down list:
10. Enter the Exciting Voltage, and select the units. 11. Enter the Series Resistance, and select the units. 12. To automatically obtained the Exciting Voltage and Series Resistance via the Rated Speed, rather than entering their values, then select the Determined by Rated Speed check box. 13. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.
Related Topics:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Rated Output Power Rated Voltage Rated Speed Operating Temperature Field Exciting Type Determined by Rated Speed
General tab. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units. General tab. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units. General tab. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units. DC Machine tab. Select Separately Excited or Self Excited from the pulldown list. Select this check box to automatically calculate the Exciting Voltage and the Series Resistance from the Rated Speed, rather than entering the values. Exciting Voltage Enter a voltage value in the field, and select the units from the pull-down list. Series Resistance Enter a resistance value in the field, and select the units from the pull-down list. Related Topics:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Claw-Pole Alternators
After you have selected Claw-Pole Alternators as your model type, enter the motor data to define the following:
General data, such as the output power, rated voltage, and speed. Stator data. Stator slot data. Stator winding data. Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, rotor diameter, and lamination. Rotor pole data. Shaft data. Solution data.
Iq
Id
If a claw-pole alternator is equipped with a permanent magnet, the d-axis armature reactance Xad and q-axis armature reactance Xaq are about constant. Otherwise, Xad is a linearized nonlinear
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
parameter, and Xaq is a linear parameter. The d-axis synchronous reactance Xd and q-axis synchronous reactance Xq are calculated directly from the following:
X d = X 1 + X ad X q = X 1 + X aq
Rotor Equipped with an Excitation Winding
If the rotor is equipped with an excitation winding, the exciting current can be adjusted, and the dand the q-axis currents are obtained based on the following process. Take the input voltage U as the reference phasor, let the power factor angle be f, then the current phasor is The phasor represented by OM can be expressed as
OM = U + I ( R 1 + jX q )
The phasor represented by OM can be used to determine the direction of E0. Let denote the power angle (the angle that U lags E0), then the angle that I lags E0 is
= +
The d- and the q-axis currents are obtained as follows
I d = I sin I q = I cos
In the phasor diagrams, the phasor length ON represents the d-axis back emf due to the d-axis resultant flux linkage and is used to determine the d-axis field saturation. From the no-load characteristic curve of the magnetic circuit, E0, Xad and the excitation current If can be determined based on the frozen method.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
For a given power angle (the angle that U lags E0), we have
I d X d + I q R 1 = ( U cos E 0 ) I d R 1 + I q X q = U sin
Solving for Id and Iq yields.
Id = tanh ---Iq
The power factor angle f (the angle that I lags U) is
=
Power and Efficiency
The output electric power is
P 2 = 3UI cos
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
P 1 = P 2 + P fw + P Cua + P Fe + P Cuf
where Pfw, PCua, PFe, , and PCuf are the frictional and wind, the armature copper, the iron-core, the excitation winding copper (if an excitation winding is equipped) losses, respectively. The input mechanical torque is
P1 T 1 = -----
where denotes the synchronous speed in rad/s. The efficiency of the generator is:
P2 = ------ 100 % P1
Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution data. 10. Choose File>Save to save the project. 11. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Once analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and new Maxwell 3D design. Refer to the Claw-Pole Alternator Problem application note, on the technical support page of the Ansoft web site, for a specific example of a permanent-magnet DC motor problem.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To define the general stator data: 1. To open the Stator Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. 3. 4. 5. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field. Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. This value is a ratio of he effective magnetic length of the core, and ranges from 0 to 1. The stacking factor is defined as the total length minus the total insulation from the laminations, divided by the total length. A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. b. c. 7. 8. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
6.
Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. Select the Slot Type: a. b. Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4). When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
Note
c. 9.
Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field.
The outer diameter of the stator core. The inner diameter of the stator core. The length of the stator core. The stacking factor of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The number of slots the stator core contains. The type of slots in the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The skew width measured in slot number.
2. 3. 4.
Bs2
Rs
Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Always available. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
5.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2. When this check box is selected, only two other fields appear in the window: Hs0 and Bs0. Parallel Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. When this check box is selected, the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed, and the Tooth Tooth Width field is added. Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth, on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed. Hs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Hs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Hs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs0 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs1 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Bs2 A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
5.
Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Branches field.
6. 7.
Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
8. 9.
10. Select the Wire Size: a. b. c. Click the button for Wire Size. The Wire Size window appears. Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list. Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the <number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated. This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge. This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file when you analyze the design. This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires. MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the Tools>Options>Machine Options command. d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the Properties window. 11. Click the End/Insulation tab. 12. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box. 13. Do one of the following:
If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature winding in the Half Turn Length field. If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator Coil
14. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field. 15. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field. 16. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
17. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field.
Slot Insulation
18. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field. 19. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field. 20. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field. 21. Click OK to close the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
4. 5. 6.
Enter the Diameter in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this diameter. Enter the Width of the wire in the table. Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table. Enter the Fillet value in the table. Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this data.
Click Add to add the new wire data. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add. When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return to the RMxprt Properties window. For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3. The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Wire Size The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the Wire Size window where you can specify units, wire type, diameter, and gauge. Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the Length Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the Properties window. When this check box is selected, the End Adjustment field appears instead. Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding. End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils, which is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator. Base Inner The inner radius of the base corner. Radius Tip Inner The inner diameter of the coil tip. Diameter End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils. Slot Liner The thickness of the slot liner insulation. Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation.
The number of conductors per stator slot (0 for auto-design). The coil pitch measured in number of slots. The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer. Limited Fill The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. Factor
Enter the diameter of the rotor yoke in the Yoke Diameter field. Click OK to close the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The diameter of the rotor yoke.
Some of the fields in the Rotor Pole window change, or are inactive, depending on the Rotor Type you select.
To define the rotor pole: 1. To open the Rotor Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. Enter the pole embrace at the pole tip in the Tip Embrace field. This value must be between 0 and 1, exclusive. 3. Enter the pole embrace at the pole root in the Root Embrace field. This value must be between 0 and 2, exclusive. 4. Enter the pole thickness at the pole tip in the Tip Thickness field. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enter the pole thickness at the pole root in the Root Thickness field. Enter the Pole Length. Enter the Slot Depth. Enter the Shoe Thickness.
Select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole from the Magnet Type pull-down menu. 10. If a magnet is being used, enter its length in the Magnet Length field. 11. Enter the width of the second air gap in the Second Air Gap field. 12. Click OK to close the Properties window.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Rotor Pole Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Tip Embrace Root Embrace Tip Thickness Root Thickness Pole Length Slot Depth Shoe Thickness Magnet Type Magnet Length Second Air Gap
The pole embrace at the pole tip. Must be > 0 and < 1. The pole embrace at the pole root. Must be > 0 and < 2. The pole thickness at the pole tip. The pole thickness at the pole root. The length of the pole. The slot depth. The shoe thickness. The type of magnet. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. For all pole types. The length of the magnet (if a magnet is used). The width of the second air gap.
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of magnetic material.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3.
Select the Load Type used in the machine from the following options:
Infinite Bus Independent Generator
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the generator in the Rated Output Power field. Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field. Enter the desired output speed of the alternator at the load point in the Rated Speed field. Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field. Click the Claw-Pole Synchronous Machine tab. Enter a value in the Rated Power Factor field.
10. To enter an Input Exciting Current, select the check box, enter a value, and select the units. 11. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.
Related Topics:
Select this check box, enter a value, and select the units. If this check box is cleared, the value will be calculated automatically rather than entered.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
General data, such as the number of poles, frictional loss, and reference speed. Stator pole and winding data, such as its associated pole dimensions, type of steel, and wire definitions. Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, rotor diameter, laminations, and windings and conductors. Commutator and brush data, such as the commutator dimensions and brush length. Shaft data. Solution data.
Also see Analysis Approach for the Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine
f = ( pn ) 60
where p is the number of pairs of poles, and n is the mechanical speed of the rotor in rpm, which is called the synchronous speed. The machine is capable of producing both the active and the reactive power as required by the load connected at the stator terminal.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Usually the frequency-domain phasor diagram is adopted to analyze the characteristics. The phasor diagrams for a generator and a motor are shown.
Generator
Motor
In the figure, R1, X1, and Xa are the armature resistance, the armature leakage reactance, and the armature reactance, respectively. In a non-salient-pole synchronous machine, Xad Xaq and they are both expressed by Xa. Taking the input voltage U as the reference phasor, for a given current:
I = I
where is the angle I lags U , which is called the power factor angle.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The internal back EMF induced by the resultant air gap field considering the effects of armature reaction Ei can be derived from:
U + ( R 1 + jX 1 ) I Ei = U ( R 1 + jX 1 ) I
Based on Ei, the resultant air gap flux considering the effects of armature reaction can be computed, and therefore, the magnetic circuit can be solved. With solved magnetic saturation factor, saturated Xa is derived, and therefore, the no-load induced voltage E0 with the same magnetic saturation (frozen magnetic circuit) can be calculated from:
E + ( jX a ) I i E0 = E i ( jX a ) I
Let the angle U legs E0 be , which is called the power angle for the generator or the torque angle for the motor, then the angle I lags E0 is
= +
The d- and the q-axis currents can be obtained respectively as follows:
I =
Id
= I sin Iq cos
Based on the magnetic circuit solution and E0, Xa and the excitation current If can be determined based on the frozen method. 1. For the generator: The output power (electric power) is directly computed from the voltage and the current as:
P 2 = 3UI cos
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
P1 T 1 = -----
where denotes the synchronous speed in rad/s. 2. For the motor: The input power (electric power) is directly computed from the voltage and the current as:
P 1 = 3UI cos
The output power (mechanical power) is defined as:
P2 T 2 = -----
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The efficiency is computed for both the generator and the motor by:
P2 = ------ 100 % P1
Related Topics:
General data, such as number of poles, losses, and reference speed. Stator data, such as dimensions, slot type, skew, and laminations. Define the Stator slot dimensions. Winding data, such as the parallel branches, conductors, and wire dimensions and insulation. Rotor data, such as the rotor dimensions, lamination and slot type. Define the Rotor slot data. Define the Shaft Data.
Solution data, such as specifying motor or generator application, and rated output voltage and frequency. You may also use the following options: Add a damper to or remove an existing damper from the rotor; Add vents to and remove existing vents from the stator.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The Properties window for a three-phase non-salient synchronous machine contains the following fields to be entered: The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Three Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine). Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. This value is the total number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two). Frictional Loss The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed. Windage Loss The windage loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed. Reference Speed The given speed of reference.
Machine Type Related Topics:
The outer diameter of the stator. The inner diameter of the stator. The length of the stator core. The stacking factor of the stator core. The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Definition window. The number of slots the stator core contains. The type of slots in the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type window. The number of lamination sectors. The magnetic press board thickness (enter 0 for a non-magnetic press board). The skew width measured in slot number.
To define general stator data: 1. To open the Stator Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.) 2. 3. 4. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator. Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator. Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field.
RMxprt Machine Types 27-249
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
5. 6.
Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. Select a Steel Type for the stator core: a. b. c. Click the button for Steel Type. The Select Definition window appears. Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
7. 8.
Enter the Number of Slots in the stator. Select the Slot Type: a. b. Click the button for the Slot Type. The Select Slot Type window appears. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 6). Slot types 1 though 4 are filled with round wire. Slot types 5 and 6 are filled with rectangular wire. If Auto Design is enabled, the software designs an optimum slot geometry; in this case, you can input the tooth width dimension, and the software determines the slot width accordingly. When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type appears, displaying the slot dimension variables. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
Note
c. 9.
10. Enter the thickness of the magnetic pressboard in the Pressboard Thickness field. Enter 0 for a non-magnetic pressboard. 11. Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field. 12. Click OK to close the Properties window.
Related Topics:
Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Always available. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically.
4.
Related Topics:
Coil Pitch
The number of layers in the stator winding. Select the winding layers from the pull-down list (available choices 1 and 2). The type of the stator winding. Set the winding type to Editor to use the Winding Editor dialog to design the coil windings The number of parallel branches in one phase of the stator winding. The total number of conductors in each stator slot. This value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. Enter 0 to have RMxprt auto-design this value. The coil pitch measured in number of slots. The coil pitch is the number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5. The number of wires per conductor. Enter 0 to have RMxprt autodesign this value. The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library. Wire size (0 for auto-design). You can assign wire size of round wires or rectangle wires. When the slot type you selected is 1 to 4, round wires are used. When the slot type you selected is 5 or 6, rectangle wires are used.
Related Topics:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Winding Editor
For a non-salient synchronous motor, you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator slot. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for each coil. To enable the Winding Editor, you must have set the Winding Property for the Winding Type to Editor.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
To access the Vent properties for a vent, double click on a vent item. The Vent Properties window contains the following fields.
Vent Ducts Duct Width Magnetic spacer width Duct pitch.
The number of radial vent ducts. The width of the radial vent ducts. Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. O for non-magnetic spacer. Center-to-Center distance between two adjacent Vent ducts
The outer diameter of the rotor core. The inner diameter of the rotor core. The length of the rotor core. Stacking factor of the rotor core. Select a steel type for the rotor core material. Magnetic press board thickness, 0 for non-magnetic press board. Number of indexing slots of the rotor core used to determine slot pitch. Number of Slots of the rotor core. Slot type of the rotor core. There are six types of rotor slots.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
In the Slot tab, define the available rotor slot dimensions as illustrated . There are in total six types of slots that are available:
Type 1 Slot
Type 2 Slot
Type 3 Slot
Type 6 Slot
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The number of parallel branches in the rotor winding. The number of conductors per slot (0 for auto-design). The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design). The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library). Wire size (0 for auto-design). You can assign wire size of round wires or rectangle wires. When you select Round Wire for Winding Type, round wires are used ((refer to section 8.4.1 Assign Round Wire Sizes). Otherwise, rectangle wires are used (refer to section 8.4.2 Assign Rectangular Wire Size).
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
The vent icon appears in the project tree under the rotor. To remove a vent to stator in a three-phase induction motor. 1. 2. Select the rotor icon in the project tree. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Remove Vent. The vent icon disappears in the project tree under the stator. The Vent data for the NSSM rotor includes the following fields.
Surface Ducts Surface Duct Width Surface Duct Depth Surface Duct Pitch Axial Ducts Axial Duct Width Axial Duct Depth
Number of surface tangential vent ducts Width of surface tangential vent ducts Depth of surface tangential vent ducts Pitch of surface tangential vent ducts Number of axial vent ducts per pole Width of axial vent ducts in main teeth Depth of axial vent ducts in main teeth
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Rated Voltage The RMS line-to-line voltage. Rated Speed The desired synchronous speed. Operating Temperature The temperature at which the system functions, and select the units. The Operating Temperature will affect all winding resistances and therefore affect all ohmic losses.
3.
In the tab sheet NSSM, define the connection data: The rated power factor. For generators, the rated output power is determined by the rated apparent power mutiplying the rated power factor. Winding Connection Select Wye or Delta from the pull-down list. Exciter Efficiency The percentage efficiency of the exciter used to supply the rotor winding with the DC current if it is mechanically connected to the shaft of the generator. The efficiency value ranges between 0% and 100% and will only affect the total efficiency result. Input Exciting Current If the check box is selected, the companying edit box is enabled. You need to input the exciting current value and select the units if needed. Exciting Current Exciting current for rated operation.
Rated Power Factor
4. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Click OK to close the pop-up dialog box Click RMxprt>Validation Check to display the information box Validation Check. If any items do not pass validation, use the diagnostic information in the window to resolve any issues. Click Close to close the information box Validation Check. When the design has been validated, click RMxprt>Analyze All. The analysis progress is shown in the Progress window and the analysis message is shown in the Message Manager.
View Performance
To view the solutions: Click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data to display the information box Solutions. It has three tab sheets. In the tab sheet Performance, from the pull-down list Data, as shown in Figure 12.15, you have 13 different data tables for the line start permanent magnet motor, which can be used to define Output Variables for design optimization:
RMxprt Machine Types 27-257
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
FEA input Data Field Winding Full-load Magnetic Variables Important Factors Material Consumption No-load Magnetic Variables Rated Operation Stator Slot Stator Winding Steady State Parameters per Unit Transient Data Transient Data per Unit Unsaturated Steady State Parameters
General Data Stator Data Stator Winding Data Rotor Data Field Winding Data Some Factors and Material Consumption Unsaturated Steady State Parameters No Load Magnetic Data Full Load Magnetic Data Full Load Electric Data Transient Parameters and Time Constants Transient FEA Input Data
Note
To print the Design Sheet: Right click the Design Sheet, select Print from the shortcut menu, select the printer and other parameters from the dialog box Print, and click OK to print.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
View Curves
In the tab sheet Curves, from the pull-down list Name, you have 10 curves as shown:
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Note
To print the plots from the Curve: Right click on the plot, select Print from the shortcut menu, select the printer and other parameters from the dialog box Print, and click OK to print.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Create Reports
1. Click RMxprt>Results>Create RMxprt Report>Rectangular Plot. The dialog box Report appears as shown:
2.
Under the tab sheet Trace, there are Variables, Output Variables, Current, Misc, Percentage, and Power under the Category column. Select one from the Category column, select the traces that belong to it from the Quantity column, and click the button Add Trace to add them one by one. Finally click the button New report to create the plot. You can always add additional curves to the same plot by repeating the process. Double click the icon Results>XY Plot1 to display the graph with multiple traces in a new window. To print the plots from the Curves: Right click on the plot, select Print from the shortcut menu, select the printer and other parameters from the dialog box Print, and click OK to print. To get a screen shot of from the Curves: Right click ont the plot, select Copy Image, then paste to a destination file.
3.
Note
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Model Setup
1. Model Depth Click Maxwell 2D>Design Setting in Maxwell2D and click Set Model Depth tab to review the Model Depth: 3590 mm. Motion Type Double click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Model>MotionSetup1 in the Project Manager window. In the Type tab you can review the Motion Type being set as Rotation, and the Moving Vector as Positive Global: Z.
27-264 RMxprt Machine Types
2.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
3.
4.
Initial Position In the Data tab of the Motion Setup panel you can review the Initial Position being set as 100 deg with Rotate Limit unchecked. The rotor initial position is set to such a position that the initial flux linkage of the phase-A winding is at its negative maximum value. Mechanical Load In the Mechanical tab of the Motion Setup panel you can review the Angular Velocity being set as 3000 rpm with Consider Mechanical Transient unchecked. Symmetry Multiplier Right click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Model in the Project Manager window, and select Set Geometry Multiplier in the pop-up panel, you can review that the Symmetry Multiplier is set as 2.
5.
Boundary Setup
1. Vector Potential Boundary Double click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Boundaries>VectorPotential1 in the Project Manager window, you can review that the highlighted outer half circle in the geometry is set as the Vector Potential Boundary, and its value is set as 0. Master Boundary Click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Boundaries>Master1 in the Project Manager window, you can review that the highlighted arrowhead line from left to right in the geometry is set as the Master Boundary. Slave Boundary Double click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Boundaries>Slave1 in the Project Manager window, you can review that the highlighted arrowhead line from right to left in the geometry is set as the Slave Boundary, and the relation of the slave boundary to the master boundary is set as Bs = -Bm. This is because the geometry includes only 1 magnetic pole of the machine.
2.
3.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Material Assignment
In the Maxwell2D modeler windows history tree, you can see that all stator and rotor coil terminals are assigned to material copper by default. Band, InnerRegion and OuterRegion are assigned as vacuum as shown:
Two new materials called DW540_50_SF0.932, and DW540_50_SF0.946 are automatically created for Stator and Rotor, based on the original material of DW540_50 used in RMxprt and the equivalent stacking factors of 0.932 and 0.946. Shaft is also assigned as DW540_50_SF0.946, because the shaft is defined as magnetic in RMxprt.
Excitation Setup
1. Windings Click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Excitations>PhaseA in the Project Manager window, all objects assigned to this phase are highlighted in the modeler window. In the Properties window, you can review all winding properties: Voltage for Winding Type; Stranded for IsSolid; 0.00226117 ohms for Resistance; 8.87325e-005 H for Inductance; 1 for Number of Parallel Branches; 11267.7 * sin(2*pi*50*time-43.4944*pi/180) for Voltage, where 50 is the frequency in Hz, 11267.7 is the phase peak voltage in Volts, pi is a predefined constant, and time is a predefined variable for time. By using sin function instead of cos function, the applied voltage and back EMF are in phase. Therefore, a phase shift in the applied voltage source will be the power angle of the motor. 43.4944 degrees is the power angle at full load
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
operation. The values for resistance, inductance and number of parallel branches are obtained from the TRANSIENT FEA INPUT DATA section in RMxprt design sheet. Clicking on PhaseB, PhaseC, or Field, you can review all objects assigned to this winding in the modeler window, and winding properties in the Properties window.
2.
Coil Terminals A winding consists of several coil terminals, and two coil terminals represent a coil in a complete 2D model. Since we are working with only one-half of the motor structure, one coil terminal can represent one complete coil with master/slave boundary conditions provided. A coil terminal has properties of Number of Conductors and Polarity Type. Number of Conductors is the number of turns per coil, and it is equal to the Number of Turns given in RMxprt divided by number of coils per phase. Polarity Type defines the direction of the current in the coil; it can be either positive or negative. Expand a winding and click on a coil terminal, you can review the object corresponding to this coil terminal in the modeler window and all coil terminal properties in the Properties window. In this example, Number of Conductors of A, B, and C coil terminals is assigned as 1, and it is 12 for the Field windings. Click on PhaseB,
RMxprt Machine Types 27-267
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
PhaseC, or Field, you can review all objects assigned to this winding in the modeler window, and winding properties in the properties window.
3.
Y Connection for Three-Phase Windings Right click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Excitations in the Project Manager Window, and click Setup Y Connection in the pop-up panel, you can review the Y -connection setup.
Solution Setup
Click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Analysis>Setup1 in the Project Manager window, you can review its properties in the Properties window: 0.2s for Stop time, that is 10 periods; 0.0002s for Time step with 100 steps per period.
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
values. Click on the X box (or the vertical line), and drag it to some place where you see the steadystate peak value of a phase current as shown:
o C A n s30 ft 0 o rp o ra t io n .0
W i nd i ng Q u i c k R e p o r t
M a xw e ll2 D D e s ig n 1
C u rve I n fo C u rr en t (P h as e A ) S e t u p 1 : T r an s i e nt C u rr en t (P h as e B ) S e t u p 1 : T r an s i e nt
20 .0 0
C u rr en t (P h as e C ) S e t u p 1 : T r an s i e nt
13 .7 7 17 10 .0 0
Y 1 [ A]
0 .0 0
- 10 .0 0
- 7.2 36 6 - 9.1 10 0
- 20 .0 0
- 30 .0 0
0. 00
50 .00
10 0 .0 0 T im e [m s ]
15 0.0 0 M X 1: 1 50 .86 0 7
2 00 .0 0
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Add X makers in Torque Quick Report to indicate the steady-state maximum and minimum values of torque as shown below. The average torque can be approximately obtained from the maximum and minimum values as Tav = (Tmax + Tmin) / 2 = (10.63 + 7.33) / 2 = 8.98 Nm.
Torque
Maxwell2DDesign1
Curve Info
20.00
15.00
Moving1.Torque [NewtonMeter]
10.6253
0.00
-5.00
-10.00
-15.00
-20.00
0.00
50.00
150.00
200.00
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Three-Phase Induction Motors Three-Phase Synchronous Machines Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Index
A
aborting analyses 6-2 adjustable-speed permanentmagnet synchronous motors general data 9-54 general procedure 9-53 stator data 9-57, 9-182, 9205 winding type 9-62 analyses re-solving 6-3 starting 6-1 stopping 6-2 auto-save file 1-5
B
BH-curve for permanent magnets 415 brush data DC motors 9-89, 9-197, 9222 brushless permanent-magnet DC motors
available circuits 9-54, 9124, 9-150 circuit type 9-54, 9-124, 9150 general data 9-55, 9-123, 9-125, 9-127, 9128, 9-129, 9-140, 9-141, 9-143, 9151 general procedure 9-123 rotor pole data 9-71, 9-79, 9-141, 9-174, 9183, 9-207 pole embrace 9-71, 9141 stator data 9-127, 9-153 conductors 9-83, 9129, 9-191, 9215 end length adjustment 9-67, 9-86, 9137, 9-170, 9194, 9-218, 9237 stator windings 9-83, 9129, 9-191, 9215 winding types 9-132
Index-1
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
transistor drop 9-56, 9-126, 9-152 trigger angle 9-55, 9-125, 9-151
E
exciter efficiency 9-120 exporting winding data 8-42 expressions dataset 2-27 defining 2-24 including in functions 2-23 intrinsic functions in 2-25 piecewise linear functions in 2-27 valid operators 2-24
C
clean stop 6-2 commutator 9-89, 9-197, 9-222 commutator type cylinder 9-89, 9-197, 9-222 pancake 9-89, 9-197, 9-222 creating a quick report 7-21 creating motor or generator models models 2-2 creating new projects 1-3 cylinder commutator type 9-89, 9-197, 9222
F
file formats .q3dx 1-7 .q3dxresults 1-7 files auto-save 1-5 Q3D Extractor 1-7 functions defining 2-23 reserved names in Q3D Extractor 2-23 selecting for a quantity 7-15 valid operators 2-24
D
data tables creating 7-12 dataset expressions adding 2-23 using 2-27 datasets adding 2-23 modifying 2-23 Design Settings in RMxprt 2-3 design variables See local variables 2-22 designs in project tree 1-15 setting up 8-1 desktop menu bar 1-10 overview 1-8 status bar 1-13 toolbars 1-12 display types of reports 7-10
I
intrinsic functions 2-25
L
line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motors 9-161 defining motors 9-163 functionality 9-161 general data 9-164 general procedure 9-163 stator data 9-164 stator data windings 9-167 stator windings 9-167
Index-2
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
P
pancake commutator type 9-89, 9-197, 9222 parameterizing See variables 2-21 parameters assigning variables to 2-27 permanent magnets linear vs. nonlinear 4-15 nonlinear 4-15 permanent-magnet DC motors brush displacement 9-90, 9-198, 9-222 brush voltage drop 9-90, 9-198, 9-223 commutator and brush data 9-89, 9197, 9-222 brush pairs 9-90, 9-198, 9-222 brush width 9-90, 9-198, 9-222 commutator diameter 9-89, 9-197, 9-222 commutator insulation 9-89, 9-197, 9-222 commutator type 9-89, 9-197, 9222 commutatorlength 9-89, 9-197, 9222 mechanical pressure of brushes 990, 9-198, 9-223 general data 9-77, 9-231 rotor data 9-81, 9-240 rotor slots 9-241 piecewise linear functions dataset expressions in 2-27 using in expressions 2-27 pole embrace (DC motors) 9-71, 9-141 post processing overview of options 7-1 primary sweep modifying the variable 7-14 specifying for 2D rectangular plots 7-10 specifying for 3D rectangular plot 7-12 specifying for data tables 7-12
M
magnetic coercivity in permanent magnets 4-15 magnetic retentivity in permanent magnets 4-15 material browser accessing 4-1 materials assigning to objects 4-1 mathematical functions See functions 2-23 menu bar overview 1-10 menus shortcut menus 1-11 Message window about 1-17 displaying 1-17
N
new projects creating 1-3 notes saving with project 1-7
O
opening existing projects 1-4 recent projects 1-4 opening projects in RMxprt 1-3 optimization analysis choosing variables to optimize 2-28 output variables deleting 7-5 specifying 7-4
Index-3
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
Project Manager window overview 1-15 showing 1-15 project tree auto expanding 1-15 showing 1-15 project variables adding 2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-24, 2-25, 227, 2-28, 2-29 naming conventions 2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 2-24, 2-25, 2-27, 2-28, 2-29 units in definition 2-21, 2-22, 2-23, 224, 2-25, 2-27, 2-28, 2-29 projects creating new 1-3 default names 2-1 managing 2-1 opening existing 1-4 opening recent 1-4 saving 1-4 saving active 1-5 saving automatically 1-5 saving copies 1-5 saving new 1-4 saving notes 1-7
creating data tables 7-12 creating quick reports 7-21 display types 7-10 modifying data in 7-9 overview 7-9 selecting a function 7-15 sweeping variables 7-14 re-solving a problem 6-3 RMxprt general procedure 2-2 setting up a model 2-2 RMxprt projects 1-3 rotor pole diagram 9-114
S
saving projects 1-4 active projects 1-5 automatically 1-5 new projects 1-4 saving copies 1-5 secondary sweep modifying the variable 7-14 specifying for 3D rectangular plot 7-11 selecting a machine type 1-3 sensitivity analysis choosing variables to include 2-28 setting up designs 8-1 setting up projects 8-1 Settings Design 2-3 setups solution 5-1 shortcut menus overview 1-11 simulations re-solving 6-3 starting 6-1 stopping 6-2 single-phase induction motors defining the motor 9-25 general data 9-26 rotor data 9-41, 9-44
Index-4
Q
quantities plotting S-parameter 7-19 quick report 7-21
R
rectangular plots creating 2D 7-10 creating 3D 7-11 reports adding traces 7-13 creating 7-9 creating 2D rectangular plots 7-10 creating 3D rectangular plots 7-11
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
rotor slots 9-42 stator data 9-28 stator slots 9-29 stator windings 9-31 solution data viewing 7-2 solution settings specifying 5-1 solution setups adding 5-1 solutions after modifying the model 6-3 re-solving 6-3 starting 6-1 stopping 6-2 solving 6-1 S-parameters plotting quantities 7-19 statistical analysis choosing variables to include 2-29 status bar overview 1-13 stopping an analysis 6-2 sweep variables in reports modifying values 7-14 switched reluctance motors defining reluctance motors 9-149 general data 9-150 stator coil data 9-154
T
three-phase induction motors defining rotor slots 9-18 defining rotor vents 9-19 defining stator conductors 9-8 defining stator windings 9-8 defining the motor 9-4 general data 9-4 friction and wind loss 9-5, 9-26, 954, 9-78, 9-124, 9-150, 9164, 9-181, 9-205, 9-231
motor speed 9-21, 9-45, 9-74, 992, 9-119, 9-144, 9-159, 9177, 9-200, 9-225, 9-243 motor voltage 9-21, 9-45, 9-74, 992, 9-119, 9-144, 9-159, 9177, 9-200, 9-225, 9-243 output power 9-21, 9-45, 9-74, 992, 9-119, 9-144, 9-159, 9177, 9-200, 9-225, 9-243 type of load 9-21, 9-45, 9-74, 9-91, 9-119, 9-144, 9-159, 9177, 9-199, 9-225, 9-243 winding connection 9-22 rotor data 9-16, 9-21, 9-70, 9-73, 9-91, 9-118, 9-140, 9-143, 9-157, 9158, 9-173, 9-176, 9-188, 9199, 9-212, 9-224, 9-242 end ring 9-19, 9-43 stator data 9-5 conductor length adjustment 9-13, 9-36, 9-37, 9-66, 9-86, 9108, 9-136, 9-154, 9-169, 9-194, 9-218, 9-236 conductors 9-8 inner diameter 9-5, 9-17, 9-28, 941, 9-57, 9-70, 9-78, 9-81, 9-97, 9-112, 9-127, 9-140, 9-153, 9-158, 9-165, 9173, 9-182, 9-189, 9-213, 9-232, 9-240 outer diameter 9-5, 9-17, 9-28, 941, 9-57, 9-70, 9-78, 9-81, 9-97, 9-112, 9-127, 9-140, 9-153, 9-158, 9-165, 9173, 9-182, 9-189, 9-205, 9-213, 9-232, 9-240 parallel branches 9-11, 9-65, 9106, 9-135, 9-155, 9-168, 9-186, 9-234 slot type 9-6, 9-16, 9-29, 9-41, 957, 9-81, 9-98, 9-127, 9165, 9-232 slots 9-6, 9-16, 9-29, 9-41, 9-57, 9-
Index-5
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
81, 9-98, 9-127, 9-153, 9158, 9-165, 9-232 stator slots 9-7 windings 9-8 wire diameter 9-12, 9-36, 9-38, 965, 9-85, 9-107, 9-135, 9155, 9-168, 9-186, 9-193, 9-217, 9-235 wire gauge 9-12, 9-37, 9-38, 9-66, 9-85, 9-107, 9-136, 9-155, 9-168, 9-186, 9-193, 9217, 9-235 wire wrap 9-11, 9-36, 9-38, 9-65, 984, 9-107, 9-135, 9-155, 9168, 9-186, 9-192, 9-216, 9-235 three-phase inductions motors stator data winding type 9-8, 9-32, 9-60, 9-83, 9-101, 9-129, 9-191, 9215, 9-234 three-phase non-salient synchronous generators general data 9-248 three-phase non-salient synchronous machine stator data inner diameter 9-249 outer diameter 9-249 slot type 9-250 slots 9-250 stator slots 9-250 stator skew 9-251 three-phase synchronous generators exciter efficiency 9-120 friction loss 9-97 general data 9-97 rotor pole diagram 9-114 rotor pole data 9-114 rotor winding data 9-115 parallel branches 9-116 winding type 9-116
wire wrap 9-116 stator data 9-97 stator slots 9-99 winding types 9-104 stator ducts 9-100, 9-251 stator skew 9-100 stator winding end clearance 9-13, 9-67, 9-86, 9108, 9-137, 9-169, 9-194, 9-218, 9-236 toolbars overview 1-12 traces adding blank 7-14 adding to reports 7-13 removing 7-14 replacing 7-14 Traces dialog box 7-9 tuning choosing variables to tune 2-29
U
units as part of variable definitions 2-21, 222, 2-23, 2-24, 2-25, 2-27, 228, 2-29 universal motors defining motors 9-180 functionality 9-179 general data 9-181 general procedure 9-180 user interface overview 1-8
V
validation check 2-6 variables adding local variables 2-22 adding project variables 2-21, 2-22, 223, 2-24, 2-25, 2-27, 2-28, 2-29
Index-6
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete
assigning to parameters 2-27 choosing to optimize 2-28 choosing to tune 2-29 dataset expressions in 2-27 including in functions 2-23 including in sensitivity analysis 2-28 including in statistical analysis 2-29 output 7-4 overview 2-21 predefined in Q3D Extractor 2-23 setting default value 2-22 types in Q3D Extractor 2-21
W
winding data exporting 8-42
Index-7
www.cadfamily.com EMail:cadserv21@hotmail.com The document is for study only,if tort to your rights,please inform us,we will delete